Revelation 14:10 — Word Study
N1904καὶ αὐτὸς πίεται ἐκ τοῦ οἴνου τοῦ θυμοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ κεκερασμένου ἀκράτου ἐν τῷ ποτηρίῳ τῆς ὀργῆς αὐτοῦ καὶ βασανισθήσεται ἐν πυρὶ καὶ θείῳ ἐνώπιον τῶν ἀγγέλων ἁγίων καὶ ἐνώπιον τοῦ ἀρνίου.
BSAalsokai he himselfautos will drinkpinō▸ [the full cup of] ofek theho wineoinos [of divine judgment] of theho angerthumos <the>ho of Godtheos [righteous] whichho mixedkerannumi■✻ [without mixture, in its full strength] undilutedakratos△ [pure, unadulterated] inen theho cuppotērion [vessel of judgment] of theho wrathorgē of Himautos [holy] andkai he will be tormentedbasanizō▸ [suffer severely, tortured] inen firepur [flames of punishment] andkai brimstonetheion [brimstone, burning stone] beforeenōpion [before the face, in full view] of theho angelsangelos holy [set apart, righteous] andkai beforeenōpion theho Lamb.arnion [Jesus, the innocent sacrifice]
| Greek | English | Parsing |
|---|---|---|
| καὶ | also | Conjunction |
| αὐτὸς | he himself | Personal pronoun, nominative, singular |
| πίεται | will drink | Verb, future, middle deponent |
| ἐκ | of | Preposition |
| τοῦ | the | Article, genitive, singular |
| οἴνου | wine | Noun, genitive, singular |
| τοῦ | of the | Article, genitive, singular |
| θυμοῦ | anger | Noun, genitive, singular |
| τοῦ | <the> | Article, genitive, singular |
| θεοῦ | of God | Noun, genitive, singular |
| τοῦ | which | Article, genitive, singular |
| κεκερασμένου | mixed | Verb, perfect, passive |
| ἀκράτου | undiluted | Adjective, genitive, singular |
| ἐν | in | Preposition |
| τῷ | the | Article, dative, singular |
| ποτηρίῳ | cup | Noun, dative, singular |
| τῆς | of the | Article, genitive, singular |
| ὀργῆς | wrath | Noun, genitive, singular |
| αὐτοῦ | of Him | Personal pronoun, genitive, singular |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| βασανισθήσεται | he will be tormented | Verb, future, passive |
| ἐν | in | Preposition |
| πυρὶ | fire | Noun, dative, singular |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| θείῳ | brimstone | Noun, dative, singular |
| ἐνώπιον | before | Preposition |
| τῶν | of the | Article, genitive, plural |
| ἀγγέλων | angels | Noun, genitive, plural |
| ἁγίων | holy | |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| ἐνώπιον | before | Preposition |
| τοῦ | the | Article, genitive, singular |
| ἀρνίου. | Lamb. | Noun, genitive, singular |
Every word in the verse. Click a row to open it in the panel on the left.
| BSB | he too will drink the wine of God’s anger, poured undiluted into the cup of His wrath. And he will be tormented in fire and sulfur in the presence of the holy angels and of the Lamb. |
| KJV | The same shall drink of the wine of the wrath of God, which is poured out without mixture into the cup of his indignation; and he shall be tormented with fire and brimstone in the presence of the holy angels, and in the presence of the Lamb: |
| ASV | he also shall drink of the wine of the wrath of God, which is prepared unmixed in the cup of his anger; and he shall be tormented with fire and brimstone in the presence of the holy angels, and in the presence of the Lamb: |
| YLT | he also shall drink of the wine of the wrath of God, that hath been mingled unmixed in the cup of His anger, and he shall be tormented in fire and brimstone before the holy messengers, and before the Lamb, |
| WEB | he also will drink of the wine of the wrath of God, which is prepared unmixed in the cup of his anger. He will be tormented with fire and sulfur in the presence of the holy angels and in the presence of the Lamb. |
| BBE | To him will be given of the wine of God's wrath which is ready unmixed in the cup of his wrath and he will have cruel pain, burning with fire before the holy angels and before the Lamb: |
Where the translations differ is in the rendering of πίεται and θυμοῦ — see How Translations Differ.
The sentence is structured around a main clause with additional descriptive phrases, creating a complex picture of judgment.
8 commentators on this verse
Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them ›
clause
subjectαὐτός
verbπίνω
The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
1 of 33 occurs nowhere else in the New Testament — a word chosen on purpose.
Bars are logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.
Deep Study — Revelation 14:10
Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.
Context — The Judgment of the Beast Worshippersgenerated
Revelation 14:10 warns of the dire consequences for those who worship the beast and its image. This verse is part of a larger passage where angels proclaim the impending judgment upon those who turn away from God. The imagery of drinking God's wrath emphasizes the seriousness of divine judgment, paralleling themes found in other scriptural warnings about sin and judgment, such as in Revelation 16:19 and Psalm 11:6.
Cross References
| Reference | Text (BSB) | |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Revelation 16:19 | The great city was split into three parts, and the cities of the nations collapsed. And God remembered Babylon the great and gave her the cup of the wine of the fury of His wrath. |
| 2 | Revelation 18:3 | All the nations have drunk the wine of the passion of her immorality. The kings of the earth were immoral with her, and the merchants of the earth have grown wealthy from the extravagance of her luxury.” |
| 3 | Job 21:20 | Let his eyes see his own destruction; let him drink for himself the wrath of the Almighty. |
| 4 | Psalm 11:6 | On the wicked He will rain down fiery coals and sulfur; a scorching wind will be their portion. |
| 5 | Psalm 60:3 | You have shown Your people hardship; we are staggered from the wine You made us drink. |
The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 36 references, hung on the phrase they belong to
The Key Word — ἀκράτου, akratosgenerated
The adjective ἀκράτος is derived from a negative particle and a root meaning 'to mix', signifying something that is undiluted or unmixed. In this context, it describes the wine of God's wrath as pure and potent, without any dilution.
This term emphasizes the severity of God's judgment, suggesting that those who face it will experience the full force of divine anger, similar to the imagery of strong wine representing judgment throughout the scriptures.
How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated
The Berean Standard Bible translates the verse with a focus on the undiluted nature of God's wrath, using the term undiluted. This is echoed in the BSB, FBV, and MSB.
However, the KJV and NWB opt for without mixture, which conveys a similar meaning but uses different phrasing. The translations largely agree on the severity of the judgment depicted.
Sentence Structuregenerated
The main clause begins with the finite verb πίεται, will drink, which governs the subject αὐτὸς (he himself). This is followed by a series of phrases that elaborate on the nature of what he will drink and the consequences that follow.
The structure includes multiple clauses and phrases that detail the subject's actions and the context of divine judgment, emphasizing the gravity of the situation through vivid imagery.
Septuagint Backgroundgenerated
The Greek word οἶνος (i.e., *oinos*) appears in the Septuagint, often used to refer to wine in various contexts, including judgment. It is linked to the Hebrew word יַ֫יִן (H3196), which also means wine.
In this context, the use of wine as a symbol of divine judgment resonates with similar themes found throughout the Old Testament, where wine often represents both blessing and curse.
In plain words — the whole versegenerated
Revelation 14:10 warns that those who worship the beast will drink the undiluted wine of God's anger and face eternal torment. This verse highlights the seriousness of rejecting God and the severe consequences that follow.
Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated
It signifies experiencing the full force of God's judgment, as those who worship the beast will face severe consequences for their actions.
The term undiluted emphasizes the purity and potency of God's wrath, indicating that it is not softened or mixed with mercy in this judgment.
The holy angels are divine messengers who serve God and witness the judgment being executed, highlighting the seriousness of the situation.
The Lamb refers to Jesus, symbolizing His role as the ultimate sacrifice and the one who stands in contrast to those facing judgment.
Reflection Questionsgenerated
- How does understanding God's judgment affect my view of sin and obedience?
- In what ways can I ensure I am not led astray by worldly influences like the beast?
- What does it mean to me that God's wrath is described as undiluted?
- How can I share the message of God's judgment and mercy with others effectively?
The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it
Early church commentators reflect on the implications of this verse regarding divine judgment and the fate of the wicked. Their insights provide a deeper understanding of the text's significance.
And he says that he will drink of the wine of the wrath of God, which is mixed undiluted in the cup of His anger. The glorious David also remembers this cup and the wine, saying that "a cup is in the hand of the Lord,Early Church Fathers on Revelation 14 →
And he also shall drink of the wine of the wrath of God, etc. By saying, "And he also shall drink," he shows that there is another who drinks, so that he does not separate the one who, although visibly not mingling with the nations,Early Church Fathers on Revelation 14 →
And he shall be tormented with fire and brimstone, etc. The saints reigning with the Lord can always see the punishment of the wicked, so that they may give greater thanks to their Redeemer, and sing the mercies of the Lord forever.Early Church Fathers on Revelation 14 →
Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse
Each of these wrote on Revelation 14:10 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.
John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire BibleThe same shall drink of the wine of the wrath of God,.... Which is a just punishment for their sin; that as such have drank of the wine of the wrath of Rome's fornication, Revelation 14:8 so they
Read John Gill on Revelation 14 →Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's CommentaryThe same shall drink of the wine of the wrath of God, which is poured out without mixture into the cup of his indignation; and he shall be tormented with fire and brimstone in the presence of the
Read Robert Jamieson on Revelation 14 →Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy BibleThose that do yield a subjection to him, and profess his faith, shall drink of the wine of the wrath of God; that is, shall feel the severity of God’ s judicial dispensations, which in Scripture are expressed by the wine cup of his fury, ; see also ; either from the intoxicating quality of wine, or the stupifying quality of it, when mixed with myrrh, or other stupifying things. But here it is said without mixture, which signifies their sensible feeling of the effects of Divine wrath. And he shall be tormented with fire and brimstone in the presence of the holy angels, and in the presence of the Lamb; that is, in short, he shall go to hell at last; the exquisiteness of which torments, as to…
Read Matthew Poole on Revelation 14 →John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments10 The same shall drink of the wine of the wrath of God, which is poured out without mixture into the cup of his indignation; and he shall be tormented with fire and brimstone in the presence of the holy angels, and in the presence of the Lamb: Ver. 10. Of the wine of the wrath of God] Wine for wine. God delights to retaliate and proportion; as he that said, Fumos vendidit, fumo pereat, He sold smoke, and by smoke let him perish. Imposturam faciunt et patientur, as the emperor said of them that sold glass for pearls: They deceived others, themselves shall be deceived much more. Without mixture] viz. Of mercy, with which God usually moderateth the cup of believers’ afflictions. See James…
Read John Trapp on Revelation 14 →AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the BibleVerse 10. The wine of the wrath of God] As they have drunk the intoxicating wine of idolatry or spiritual fornication, they shall now drink the wine of God's wrath, which is poured out into the cup of his indignation. This is an allusion to the poisoned cup, which certain criminals were obliged to drink, on which ensued speedy death. See Clarke on Hebrews 2:9. Shall be tormented with fire and brimstone] An allusion to the punishment of Sodom and Gomorrha for their unnatural crimes. Presence of the holy angels, and-of the Lamb] These being the instruments employed in their destruction; the Lamb-the Lord Jesus Christ, acting as judge.
Read AdamClarke on Revelation 14 →CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges10. drink of the wine of the wrath of God] Psalms 75:8 (9); Isaiah 51:17; Isaiah 51:22; Jeremiah 25:15 sqq.poured out without mixture] Lit. mixed unmixed: there is prob. nothing meant but the sense of the A. V., the “pouring out” of wine being usually a process of “mixing.” But the paradoxical form of expression comes from the LXX. of Psalms 75:8, where the word “red” (or perhaps “foaming,” “fiery”) is translated by “unmixed,” proving that St John knows and uses the LXX. version, though he corrects it when necessary.with fire and brimstone] Perhaps rather in. See Revelation 19:20, Revelation 20:15, Revelation 21:8.in the presence, &c.] It is impossible to translate these words otherwise…
Read Cambridge on Revelation 14 →Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the BibleThe same shall drink of the wine of the wrath of God - See notes on Revelation 14:8. The “wine of the wrath of God” is the cup in the hand of the Lord, which, when drunk, makes them reel and fall.
Read Albert Barnes on Revelation 14 →Daniel Denison Whedon1808–1885Whedon's Commentary on the Bible10. Wine of the wrath of God—The double effect of wine—first to exhilarate, and then, when drunk in full quantity, to asphyxiate—is here alluded to. The former images the exciting power of sin, the latter its destructive effect.
Read Daniel Denison Whedon on Revelation 14 →The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company
Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.
Modern formal
he too will drink the wine of God’s anger, poured undiluted into the cup of His wrath. And he will be tormented in fire and sulfur in the presence of the holy angels and of the Lamb.
he also will drink of the wine of the wrath of God, which is prepared unmixed in the cup of his anger. He will be tormented with fire and sulfur in the presence of the holy angels and in the presence of the Lamb.
he too will drink the wine of God’s anger, poured undiluted into the cup of His wrath. And he will be tormented in fire and sulfur in the presence of the holy angels and of the Lamb.
that person will also drink of the wine of God’s anger that has been mixed undiluted in the cup of his wrath, and he will be tortured with fire and sulfur in front of the holy angels and in front of the Lamb.
Tyndale line
The same shall drink of the wine of the wrath of God, which is poured out without mixture into the cup of his indignation; and he shall be tormented with fire and brimstone in the presence of the holy angels, and in the presence of the Lamb:
he also shall drink of the wine of the wrath of God, which is prepared unmixed in the cup of his anger; and he shall be tormented with fire and brimstone in the presence of the holy angels, and in the presence of the Lamb:
he also shall drink of the wine of the wrath of God, which is prepared unmixed in the cup of his anger; and he shall be tormented with fire and brimstone in the presence of the holy angels, and in the presence of the Lamb:
The same shall drink of the wine of the wrath of God, which is poured out without mixture into the cup of his indignation; and he shall be tormented with fire and brimstone in the presence of the holy angels, and in the presence of the Lamb:
The same shall drinke of the wine of ye wrath of God, yea, of the pure wine, which is powred into the cup of his wrath, and he shalbe tormented in fire and brimstone before the holy Angels, and before the Lambe.
Strictly literal
he also shall drink of the wine of the fury of God prepared unmixed in the cup of his wrath, and he shall be tormented in fire and brimstone before the holy angels and before the Lamb.
he also shall drink of the wine of the wrath of God, that hath been mingled unmixed in the cup of His anger, and he shall be tormented in fire and brimstone before the holy messengers, and before the Lamb,
he also will drink of the wine of the wrath of God that has been mingled unmixed in the cup of His anger, and he will be tormented in fire and brimstone before the holy messengers, and before the Lamb,
he will also drink some of the wine of God's wrath, the wine that has been poured undiluted into the cup of his anger. The person who drinks it will be tormented with fire and sulfur before God's holy angels and before the Lamb.
From the Latin
He also shall drink of the wine of the wrath of God, which is mingled with pure wine in the cup of his wrath, and shall be tormented with fire and brimstone in the sight of the holy angels, and in the sight of the Lamb.
Simplified
they will also drink of the wine of God's furious opposition that is poured undiluted into the cup of his anger, and they will suffer anguish in fire and burning sulfur before the holy angels and the Lamb.
To him will be given of the wine of God's wrath which is ready unmixed in the cup of his wrath and he will have cruel pain, burning with fire before the holy angels and before the Lamb:
Word by word, the decisions they made
Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.
The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank
This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.
Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.
The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac
Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.
et hic bibet de vino iræ Dei, quod mistum est mero in calice iræ ipsius, et cruciabitur igne, et sulphure in conspectu angelorum sanctorum, et ante conspectum Agni :
Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.
ܐܦ ܗܘ ܢܫܬܐ ܡܢ ܚܡܪܐ ܕܚܡܬܗ ܕܡܪܝܐ ܕܡܙܝܓ ܕܠܐ ܚܠܛܐ ܒܟܣܐ ܕܪܘܓܙܗ ܘܢܫܬܢܩ ܒܢܘܪܐ ܘܟܒܪܝܬܐ ܩܕܡ ܡܠܐܟܐ ܩܕܝܫܐ ܘܩܕܡ ܐܡܪܐ
The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.
Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.
The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say
Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.
καὶ αὐτὸς πίεται ἐκ τοῦ οἴνου τοῦ θυμοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ κεκερασμένου ἀκράτου ἐν τῷ ποτηρίῳ τῆς ὀργῆς αὐτοῦ καὶ βασανισθήσεται ἐν πυρὶ καὶ θείῳ ἐνώπιον — ἀγγέλων ἁγίων καὶ ἐνώπιον τοῦ ἀρνίου.
The standard critical text of the New Testament.
καὶ αὐτὸς πίεται ἐκ τοῦ οἴνου τοῦ θυμοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ κεκερασμένου ἀκράτου ἐν τῷ ποτηρίῳ τῆς ὀργῆς αὐτοῦ καὶ βασανισθήσεται ἐν πυρὶ καὶ θείῳ ἐνώπιον — ἀγγέλων ἁγίων καὶ ἐνώπιον τοῦ ἀρνίου.
The previous edition, still widely cited.
καὶ αὐτὸς πίεται ἐκ τοῦ οἴνου τοῦ θυμοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ κεκερασμένου ἀκράτου ἐν τῷ ποτηρίῳ τῆς ὀργῆς αὐτοῦ καὶ βασανισθήσεται ἐν πυρὶ καὶ θείῳ ἐνώπιον — ἀγγέλων ἁγίων καὶ ἐνώπιον τοῦ ἀρνίου.
The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.
καὶ αὐτὸς πίεται ἐκ τοῦ οἴνου τοῦ θυμοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ κεκερασμένου ἀκράτου ἐν τῷ ποτηρίῳ τῆς ὀργῆς αὐτοῦ καὶ βασανισθήσεται ἐν πυρὶ καὶ θείῳ ἐνώπιον — ἀγγέλων ἁγίων καὶ ἐνώπιον τοῦ ἀρνίου.
The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.
καὶ αὐτὸς πίεται ἐκ τοῦ οἴνου τοῦ θυμοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ κεκερασμένου ἀκράτου ἐν τῷ ποτηρίῳ τῆς ὀργῆς αὐτοῦ καὶ βασανισθήσεται ἐν πυρὶ καὶ θείῳ ἐνώπιον — ἀγγέλων ἁγίων καὶ ἐνώπιον τοῦ ἀρνίου.
An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.
καὶ αὐτὸς πίεται ἐκ τοῦ οἴνου τοῦ θυμοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ κεκερασμένου ἀκράτου ἐν τῷ ποτηρίῳ τῆς ὀργῆς αὐτοῦ καὶ βασανισθήσεται ἐν πυρὶ καὶ θείῳ ἐνώπιον — ἀγγέλων ἁγίων καὶ ἐνώπιον τοῦ ἀρνίου.
A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.
καὶ αὐτὸς πίεται ἐκ τοῦ οἴνου τοῦ θυμοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ κεκερασμένου ἀκράτου ἐν τῷ ποτηρίῳ τῆς ὀργῆς αὐτοῦ καὶ βασανισθήσεται ἐν πυρὶ καὶ θείῳ ἐνώπιον τῶν — ἁγίων καὶ ἐνώπιον τοῦ ἀρνίου.
The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.
καὶ αὐτὸς πίεται ἐκ τοῦ οἴνου τοῦ θυμοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ κεκερασμένου ἀκράτου ἐν τῷ ποτηρίῳ τῆς ὀργῆς αὐτοῦ καὶ βασανισθήσεται ἐν πυρὶ καὶ θείῳ ἐνώπιον τῶν — ἁγίων καὶ ἐνώπιον τοῦ ἀρνίου.
The printed tradition behind the King James Version.
A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.
Word by word, across the editions
| Word | Editions carrying it | Missing from |
|---|---|---|
| τῶν of the | TR, Byz | NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn |
| ἀγγέλων angels | NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg | TR, Byz |
The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with
This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.
Lexicons — every word in Revelation 14:10
One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.
Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
ol'-so: In the Greek kai, when it is equivalent to "also" or "even," is always placed before the word or phrase which it is intended to emphasize (e.g. Ac 12:3; 1 Joh 4:21). Mt 6:14 should therefore read, "Your heavenly Father will forgive you also"; Lu 6:13, "Whom also he named apostles"; Heb 8:6, "The mediator of a better covenant also"; and 1Th 4:14, `If we believe that Jesus died and rose again, so also (we believe that) those who are fallen asleep in Jesus, God will bring with Him.'
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.
αὐτός, -ή, -ό,
determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).
Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);
self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…
αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…
Read the full entry →αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…
Read the full entry →αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.
αὐτός
(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),
I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…
αὐτός
autos
from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea
of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used
(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the
proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,
the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-
)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,
- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),
those, together, very, which. Compare 848.
see GREEK for 109
see GREEK for 1438
see GREEK for 848
αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό
Pers.pr.
he, she, it, they, them, same
αὐτός autos 5x
self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1
αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:
oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.
of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.
by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.
in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.
Pron-NSM — Personal pronoun · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
P-NSM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.
πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…
Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος
ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος
πίνω is a Greek verb meaning 'to drink,' used in both literal and figurative contexts. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often referring to drinking water, wine, or the blood of Christ. The word can also describe the earth absorbing rain. Notably, there are variations in its forms, such as πεῖν and πίομαι, which are mentioned in the entries.
πίνω,
[in LXX chiefly for שׁתה;]
to drink: absol., Lk 2:19, Jo 4:7, al.; c. acc. rei, Mt 6:25, 31, Mk 14:25, al.; of habitual use, Lk 1:15, Ro 14:21, al.; by meton., τὸ ποτήριον, I Co 10:21, al.; of the earth absorbing rain (Hdt., al.), He 6:7; spiritually, of the blood of Christ, Jo 6:53, 54, 56; seq. ἐκ (of the vessel), Mt 26:27, al.; id. (of the drink; Bl., § 36, 1), Mt 26:29, Jo 4:13, 14,
πίνω; impf. ἔπινον ; fut. πίομαι [cf. W. 90 sq. (86)], 2 pers. sing. πίεσαι (Lk. xvii. 8 [(see reff. in κατακαυχάοpa)}); pé. 3 pers. sing. (Rev. xviii. 3) πέπωκε RG, but LT WH org. plur. -καν, for which L ed. ster. Tr txt. WH txt. read πέπτωκαν (see γίνομαι) ; 2 aor. ἔπιον, impy. mie (Lk. xii. 19), inf. πιεῖν ([Mt. xx. 22; xxvii. 34 (not Tdf.); Mk. x. 38]; Acts xxiii. 12 [not WH], 21; Ro. xiv. 21 [not WH], ete.), and in colloquial form πῖν (Lehm. in Jn. iv. 9; Rev. xvi. 6), and πεῖν (T Tr WH in Jn. iv. 7,9 sq.; T WH in 1 Co. ix. 4; x. 7; Rev. xvi. 6; Tin Mt. xxvii. 34 (bis); WH in Acts xxiii. 12, 21; Ro. xiv. 21, and often among the var. of the codd.) —on these forms see [esp. WH. App. p. 170]; Fritzsche, De conformatione N. T. critica ete. p. 27 sq.; B. 66 (58) sq.; [Curtius, Das Verbum, ii. 103]; Sept. for 7nw; [fr. Hom. down]; to drink: absol., Lk. xii. 19; Jn. iv. 7, 10; 1 Co. xi.…
Read the full entry →πίνω. In P Par 4733 (as read in UPZ i. p. 332—B.c. 152-1) the strategus spends two days in the Anubieion πίνων, ‘‘ drinking,” apparently in connexion with some festival. The schoolboy who does not get his own way informs his father π-οὐ μὴ φάγω, οὐ μὴ πείνω" ταῦτα, “1 won't eat, I won't drink: there now!’’ (P Oxy I. 1191 (= Selections, p. 103) —ii/iii a.D.). And the magical P Lond 12118 (iii/a.p.) (=I. p. 90) supplies a recipe enabling a man πολλὰ πίνειν καὶ μὴ μεθύειν, ‘to drink much and not be drunk.” With 1 Cor 158? Deissmann (LAZ p. 296) compares a sepulchral epigram of the Imperial period in which the passer-by is exhorted—reive, βλέπις τὸ τέλος, “drink, thou seest the end.” Cf. Kazbe/ 6461 (iii/iv A.D.) οὐκ ὁ θανὼν πίεται, and Sy// 804 (=% 1170) (ii/A.D.) πιόντος pov γάλα μόνον, in connexion with a cure at the temple of Asclepius in Epidaurus. For Heb 67 cf. Anacreontea xxi. 1 ἣ…
Read the full entry →πίνω (pinō) — to drink.
πίνω [ῑ],
Epic dialect infinitive πινέμεναι and -έμεν, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Ionic dialect imperfect πίνεσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future πίομαι [Refs 6th c.BC+]; also as falsa lectio in earlier authors, πιεῖσθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 2nd pers. singular πίεσαι [LXX+NT]aorist ἔπῐον, Epic dialect πίον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 2nd pers. singular subjunctive πίῃσθα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πίει, πίεις, Kretschmer [Refs]; infinitive πιεῖν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; later contraction πεῖν [Refs 1st c.AD+]; Epic dialect πῐέμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+] falsa lectio for{ὑπιέναι} in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; participle πῐών, πῐοῦσα, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—middle, subjunctive πινώμεθα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: πίομαι [ῑ] as present middle, [Refs 6th c.BC+] (passive in [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:—passive, [Refs 8th c.BC+]imperfect πίνετο [Refs 8th c.BC+] —Other tenses are from πω- or πο-, perfect πέπωκα [Refs 4th c.BC+] —passive…
Read the full entry →πίνω
pino
pio pee'-o, which (together with another form)
poo po'-o
occurs only as an alternate in certain tenses; to imbibe (literally or
figuratively):--drink.
πίνω
v.
I drink, imbibe
πίνω to drink, Hom., etc.; π. ὕδωρ Αἰσήποιο to drink its water, i. e. live on its banks, Il.;—or c. gen. partit. to drink of a thing, π. οἴνοιο (as Fr. du vin), Od.; αἵματος ὄφρα πίω id. Od.:—also, πίνειν κρητῆρας οἴνοιο to drink bowls of wine, Il.; π. ἀπὸ κρήνης to drink of a spring, Theogn.; δέπα, ἔνθεν ἔπινον Od.; π. ἐκ ταὐτοῦ ποτηρίου Ar.; ἐξ ἀργύρου ἢ χρυσοῦ Plat.; ἀπὸ τοῦ ποταμοῦ Xen.: —also, σκύφον ὧιπερ ἔπινον with which . . , Od.:— absol., Hom., etc.; πῖνε, πῖν᾽ ἐπὶ συμφοραῖς Ar.; διδόναι πιεῖν to give to drink, Hdt.; πιεῖν αἰτεῖν Xen.:— in perf. πέπωκα, to be drunk, Eur.; but, πίνοντά τε καὶ πεπωκότα drinking and having finished drinking…
Read the full entry →Verb-FDI-3S — Verb · future · middle deponent · indicative · third person · singularfuture middle deponent indicative — an action still to come.
V-FDI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Future Voice: middle Deponent Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular
See FOOD; DRINK, STRONG.
Drink
The drinks of the Hebrews were water, wine, “strong drink,” and vinegar. Their drinking vessels were the cup, goblet or “basin,” the “cruse” or pitcher, and the saucer.
To drink water by measure (Ezek. 4:11), and to buy water to drink (Lam. 5:4), denote great scarcity. To drink blood means to be satiated with slaughter.
The Jews carefully strained their drinks through a sieve, through fear of violating the law of Lev. 11:20, 23, 41, 42. (See Matt. 23:24. “Strain at” should be “strain out.”)
→ INTOXICATING
See ABSTINENCE, TOTAL
→ See DRUNKARD
→ See DRUNKENNESS
→ See WINE
75 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 28 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 73 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 141 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἐὰν δὲ ὁ λόγος ἰσχύσῃ ἀνακαθᾶραι τὸ πάθος, οὔτε πίνοντες μεθυσκόμεθα οὔτε ἐσθίοντες ἐξυβρίζομεν διὰ κόρον, ἀλλὰ δίχα τοῦ ληρεῖν νηφάλια σιτούμεθα.
τούτων ἀκροασάμενος ἔχαιρέ τε τοῖς γεγονόσι καὶ τοῖς εἰρημένοις τὸν θεὸν οὕτως ὁρῶν αὐτῷ τῆς ὁδοῦ σαφῶς συλλαμβάνοντα, καὶ προκομίσας ὁρμίσκον τε καί τινας κόσμους, οὓς εὐπρεπὲς φορεῖν παρθένοις, ἀνεδίδου τῇ κόρῃ τῆς ἐπὶ τῷ πιεῖν χάριτος ἀμοιβὴν…
Πᾶσα δόξα καὶ πλατυσμὸς ἐδόθη ὑμῖν, καὶ ἐπετελέσθη τὸ γεγραμμένον: Ἔφαγεν καὶ ἔπιεν, καὶ ἐπλατύνθη, καὶ ἐπαχύνθη, καὶ ἀπελάκτισεν ὁ ἠγαπημένος.
μάλιστα δέ ἐστί μοι διʼ εὐχῆς. ὁσάκι γὰρ ἐὰν μνησθῶ ὑμῶν οὔτε ἔσθω οὔτε πίνω ἀλλὰ κλαίω … … νηση … … … σο … ιου ἐμοὶ μόνῳ
Πρόκλου πρός σε σπεύδειν. ἡδέως σε, ἄδελφε, ἀσπάζομαι καὶ ἐντυγχάνω ἐμὲ θεῶν ἐπιτρεπόντων τὸ ἐπιὸν καὶ σὲ τ … … … υσα … ἐκ γράμματος … … ι
δὲ τῇ τοῦ κγ ἔτους ἀπογραφῇ καὶ … τὸν ἐπικρινόμενον ἡμῶν υἱὸν … … πίων γεγυμνασιαρχηκὼς … … σεσημείωμαι Πωλίων ἀποδεδειγμένος γυμνασίαρχος … … … δης γεγυμνασιαρχηκὼς
The Greek word ἐκ (transliterated as ek) is a preposition that means 'from' or 'out of,' governing the genitive case. It indicates origin, separation, or motion away from a place, time, or cause. In the New Testament, it is used to denote various relationships, such as source or distinction, and appears in contexts like John 6:31 and Matthew 1:3. Different lexicons highlight its versatility in both literal and metaphorical senses.
ἐκ (ἐξ),
prep. c. gen.,
from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492).
ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ,
prep. c. gen.,
of motion outwards, separation from (opp. to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from.
Of Place,
ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, a preposition governing the genitive. It denotes as well exit or emission out of, as separation from, something with which there has been close connection ; opp. to the prepositions εἰς into and ἐν in: from out of, out from, forth from, from, (Lat. e, ex), [ οἵ. W. 364, 366 (343) sq.; B. 326 sq. (281)]. It is used I. of Pace, and 1. univ. of the place from which; from a surrounding or enclosing place, from the interior of: ἄρτος, ἄγγελος, φῶς ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Jn. vi. 81 sq.; Acts ix. 3 [here RG ἀπό]; Gal. 1. 8; ἀνατολή, δύναμις ἐξ ὕψους, Lk. i. 78; xxiv. 49; esp. after verbs of going, fleeing, leading, calling, freeing, removing, releasing, etc. : ἥκειν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας eis τ. Γαλιλαίαν, Jn. iv. 47; ἐξέρχεσθαι ἔκ τινος out of the body of one (spoken of demons), Mk. i. 25; v. 8 [here L mrg. ἀπό]; vii. 29; of power emanating from the body, Mk. v. 30 [cf. B. 301 (258)…
Read the full entry →ἐκ 190 passages as P Tebt I. 23" (c. B.C. 119 or 114) οὐκ ὀρθῶς κρίνομεν πέπρακταί σοι μὴ ἐκ τῆς ἡμῶν προεδρίας πεφροντικέναι ἀπροσδέητον ἑτέρων γενέσθαι, ‘I consider that you have acted badly in not having been careful that he should be independent of others owing to my superior rank ”’ (Edd. ), 24. 248° (B.c. 117) ἔκ τε τῆς πλείστης προσεδρείας, ‘on account of the prolonged attendance ’’ (Edd.), and P Fay 12} (c. B.C. 103) ἐκ κοινολογ[ς(]α[ς] τ[ἢ]ς συνσταθείσης πρὸς αὐτούς, ‘‘as the result of the colloquy which took place between τ᾿ (Edd.). From this it is an easy transition to the meaning ‘‘ according to”’ or “in accordance with,’’ as in the common legal phrase καθάπερ ἐγ δίκης, ‘‘as if in accordance with a legal decision,’’ z. δ. ‘‘as if a formal decree of the court had been obtained,’’ as in P Eleph 1132 (B.C. 311-0) (= Selections, p- 3), P Ryl 11. 15435 (a.p. 66): cf. P Petr III.…
Read the full entry →ἐκ (ek) — out from.
ἐκ,
before a vowel ἐξ, also
__A ἐξ τῳ ϝοίκῳ [Refs] and less frequently ; ἐγ- in Inscrr. before β γ δ λ μ ; Cretan dialect and Boeotian dialect ἐς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἐχ frequently in Attic dialect Inscrr. before χ φ θ (and in early Inscrr. before ς, [Refs]:—preposition governing GEN. only (except in [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—radical sense, from out of, frequently also simply, from.
__A.I OF PLACE, the most frequently usage, variously modified:
__A.I.1 of Motion, out of, forth from, ἐκ Πύλου ἐλθὼν τηλόθεν ἐξ ἀπίης γαίης [Refs 8th c.BC+] to strike with a spear in the hand, opposed to ἀντιτοξεύειν or ἀκοντίζειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐκ χρυσῶν φιαλῶν πίνειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]
ἐκ
ek
or ex ex
a primary preposition denoting origin (the point whence action or
motion proceeds), from, out (of place, time, or cause; literal or
figurative; direct or remote):--after, among, X are, at,
betwixt(-yond), by (the means of), exceedingly, (+ abundantly above),
for(- th), from (among, forth, up), + grudgingly, + heartily, X
heavenly, X hereby, + very highly, in, ...ly, (because, by reason) of,
off (from), on, out among (from, of), over, since, X thenceforth,
through,
X unto, X vehemently, with(-out). Often used in composition,
with the same general import; often of completion.
ἐκ, ἐξ
Prep.
from out, out from among, from
ἐκ ek 915x
ἐχ before vowels, with genitive, from, out of, a place, Mt. 2:15; 3:17; of, from, out of, denoting origin or source, Mt. 1:3; 21:19; of, from some material, Mt. 3:9; Rom. 9:21; of, from, among, partitively, Mt. 6:27; 21:31; Mk. 9:17; from, denoting cause, Rev. 8:11; 17:6; means or instrument, Mt. 12:33, 37; by, through, denoting the author or efficient cause, Mt. 1:18; Read the full entry →
ἐκ
ἐξ before a vowel, ἐγ before β γ δ λ μ prep. governing GEN. only, Lat. e, exRadical sense, from out of, opp. to εἰς:
out of, from. c. gen.
OF PLACE:
of Motion, out of, forth from, Hom., etc.: ἐκ θυμοῦ φίλεον I loved her from my heart, with all my heart, Il.
to denote change from one place or condition to another, κακὸν ἐκ κακοῦ one evil from (or after) another, id. Il.; λόγον ἐκ λόγου λέγειν Dem.
to express distinction from a number, ἐκ πόλεων πίσυρες four out of many, Il.
of Position, like ἔξω, outside of, beyond, ἐκ βελέων out of shot, id. Il.; ἐκ καπνοῦ out of the smoke, Od.
with Verbs of Rest, ἐκ ποταμοῦ χρόα νίζετο washed his body with water from the river, id. Od.:—with Verbs signifying to hang or fasten, ἐκ πασσαλόφι κρέμασεν φόρμιγγα he hung his lyre from (i. e. on) the peg, id.…
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
ov:
(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.
OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]
1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.
I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.
For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.
It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.
Lamentations 3:1.
The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.
Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.
That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.
Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…
933 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 26 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 913 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word οἶνος (i.e., *oinos*) means "wine" and is used both literally and metaphorically in various contexts. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often referring to the beverage itself or symbolically to represent concepts like joy or judgment. The lexicons note its use in the Septuagint and classical literature, and it can also refer to fermented drinks made from other ingredients, such as barley.
οἶνος, -ov, ὁ, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 7), also for WITT (must, new wine), ὍΤΙ, ete.; wine; a. prop.: Mt. ix. 17; [xxvii. 34 Ltxt.T Tr WH]; Mk. xv. 23; 11.1.15; Jn. 11. 8; Ro. xiv. 21; Eph.v.18; 1 Tim. v. 23; Rey. xvii. 2, ete.; οἴνῳ προσέχειν, 1 Tim. iii. 8; δουλεύειν, Tit. ii. 3. b. metaph.: οἶνος τοῦ θυμοῦ (see 9 ? , “ OK TANMEPOS
οἶνος. It is hardly necessary to illustrate this common word, but we may note οἶνος καινός in Ostr 1142 (beginning of iii/ A.D.) as the antithesis to οἶνος παλαιός in 7. 1129, not νέος as in [Lk] 58%. See also P Lond 11135? cited s.v. ὅδοιπορέω. For the dim. οἰνάριον cf. P Eleph 135 (B.c. 223-2) (= Witkowski?, p. 43) περὶ δὲ τοῦ oivaplov ΤΤραξιάδης οὔπω εἰσελήλυθεν ἐξ ἀγροῦ, P Oxy XIV. 16725 (A.D. 37-41) πολλὰ λέα οἰνάρια, ‘‘a quantity of quite thin wine,” and P Grenf II. 773° (iii/iv A.D.) (= Selections, p. 122), where provision is made that the man who is conveying a dead body for burial shall be entertained—ev ψωμίοις kal [οἰ]ναρίῳ καὶ ἐλαίῳ, ‘with delicacies and thin wine and olive-oil.’’ Οἰνηγία, ‘‘conveyance of wine,” is found in P Oxy XIV. 1651° (iii/A.D.), and the corresponding adj. οἰνηγός (not in LS) in PSI VI. 568? (B.c. 253-2): cf. οἰνικός in 20. 715! (A.D. 92), with the…
Read the full entry →οἶνος (oinos) — wine.
οἶνος, ὁ,
wine, μέλας οἶ. (compare οἶνοψ) [Refs 8th c.BC+] over one's cups, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also in plural, ἡ ἐν τοῖς οἴ. διατριβή [Refs 5th c.BC+] wines, X.[same place], [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἶνος δωδεκάδραχμος wine at [Refs 4th c.BC+]; οἶνος καὶ ἀλάθεα (see. ἀλήθεια), in vino veritas, [Refs 7th c.BC+]; οἴνῳ τὸν οἶ. ἐξελαύνειν 'to take a hair of the dog that bit you', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially with names of places, Θάσιος, Χῖος, etc., [Refs 4th c.BC+]: resin was used as a preservative, πισσίτης οἶ. [Refs 1st c.AD+]
2. fermented juice of other kinds, οἶνος ἐκ κριθέων πεποιημένος barley wine, a kind of beer, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἶ. φοινικήϊος palm-wine, [Refs]; lotus-wine, [Refs]; from which drinks grape-wine (οἶ.…
οἶνος
oinos
a primary word (or perhaps of Hebrew origin (3196)); "wine" (literally
or figuratively):--wine.
see HEBREW for 03196
οἶνος, ου, ὁ
n.m.
wine
οἶνος οἶνος, ὁ, Lat. vinum, wine, Hom., etc.; παρ᾽ οἴνῳ over one's wine, Lat. inter pocula, Soph.; οἶνος ἐκ κριθῶν barley- wine, a kind of beer, Hdt.
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
Wine
The common Hebrew word for wine is yayin, from a root meaning “to boil up,” “to be in a ferment.” Others derive it from a root meaning “to tread out,” and hence the juice of the grape trodden out. The Greek word for wine is oinos_, and the Latin _vinun. But besides this common Hebrew word, there are several others which are thus rendered.
(1.) Ashishah (2 Sam. 6:19; 1 Chr. 16:3; Cant. 2:5; Hos. 3:1), which, however, rather denotes a solid cake of pressed grapes, or, as in the Revised Version, a cake of raisins.
(2.) ‘Asis, “sweet wine,” or “new wine,” the product of the same year (Cant. 8:2;
The manufacture of wine is carried back in the Bible to the age of Noah, (Genesis 9:20,21) to whom the discovery of the process is apparently, though not explicitly, attributed. The natural history and culture of the vine are described under a separate head. [VINE] The only other plant whose fruit is noticed as having been converted into wine was the pomegranate. (Solomon 8:2) In Palestine the vintage takes place in September, and is celebrated with great rejoicing. The ripe fruit was gathered in baskets, (Jeremiah 6:9) as represented in Egyptian paintings, and was carried to the wine-press. It was then placed in the upper one of the two vats or receptacles of which the winepress was formed, and was subjected to the process of "treading," which has prevailed in all ages in Oriental…
The vine being natural to the soil of Canaan and its vicinity, wine was much used as a beverage, especially at festivals, Es 1:7 5:6 Da 5:1-4 Joh 2:3. As one of the staple products of the Holy Land, it was employed for drink-offerings in the temple service, Ex 20:26 Nu 15:4-10; it was included among the "first-fruits," De 18:4, and was used in the celebration of the Passover, and subsequently of the Lord’s supper, Mt 26:27-29. Together with corn and oil it denoted all temporal supplies,
34 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 34 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 124 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ταύτῃ χρῆται ὁ Νῶε γυμνούμενος, ὅταν πίῃ τοῦ οἴνου·
Νῶχος μετὰ τὴν ἐπομβρίαν τῆς γῆς κατασταθείσης εἰς τὴν αὐτῆς φύσιν ἐπʼ ἔργα χωρεῖ καὶ καταφυτεύσας αὐτὴν ἀμπέλοις, ἡνίκα τοῦ καρποῦ τελεσφορηθέντος καθʼ ὥραν ἐτρύγησε καὶ παρῆν εἰς χρῆσιν ὁ οἶνος, θύσας ἐν εὐωχίαις ἦν.
ὡσαύτως κεράμιον οἴνου ἡ ἐλαίου ἀνοίξας, τὴν ἀπαρχὴν λαβὼν δὸς τοῖς προφήταις:
δ αἳ πυροῦ κ ϛ μα … πυροῦ … γ, λοιπὸν πυροῦ γ 𐅵, οἴνου κεράμια … πυροῦ γ γίνονται πυροῦ ϛ 𐅵, τ … ολ … εισονφαι, λοιπὸν
Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἐδάνεισεν Ναομσῆσις Σπεμμίνιος Περσίνη Ψενθώτηι Ἀλύκιος Πέρσῃ τῆς ἐπιγονῆς οἴνου κεράμια ὀκτὼ ἄτοκα. τὸ δὲ δάνειον τοῦτο ἀποδότω τῇ Ναομσήσι ἐν μηνὶ Ἐπεὶφ λ
ἐκ Παθύρεως Ψεμμενχῆι Νεχούθου τοῦ Πβούκιος Πέρσηι τῆς ἐπιγονῆς τῶν ἐκ τῆς αὐτῆς Παθύρεως οἴνου κεράμια ἓξ ἄτοκα. τὸ δὲ δάνειον τοῦτο ἀποδότω Ψεμμενχῆς Πετεαρσεμθεῖ ἐν μηνὶ Μεσορὴ τοῦ
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
ov:
(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.
OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]
1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.
I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.
For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.
It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.
Lamentations 3:1.
The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.
Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.
That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.
Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
θυμός refers to a passionate state, often associated with anger or wrath. It is derived from the verb θύω, meaning to breathe hard or be heated. The term appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as in Romans 2:8 and Revelation 14:10, where it conveys strong emotional responses. Some lexicons note a distinction between θυμός and related terms like ὀργή, with θυμός indicating a more transient emotional outburst.
Θυμός and ὀργή are found several times together in the N. T. (as at Rom. ii. 8; Ephes. iv. 31; Col. iii. 8; Rev. xix. 15); often also in the Septuagint (Ps. lxxvii. 49; Dan. iii. 13; Mic. v. 15), and often also in other Greek (Plato, Philebus, 47 6; Polybius, vi. 56. 11; Josephus, Antt. xx. 5. 3; Plutarch, De Coh. Ird, 2; Lucian, De Cal. 23); nor are they found only in the connexion of juxtaposition, but one made dependent on the other; thus θυμὸς τῆς ὀργῆς (Rev. xvi. 19; ef. Job iii. 17; Josh. vii. 26); while ὀργὴ θυμοῦ, not occurring in the N. T., is frequent in the Old (2 Chron. xxix. 10; Lam. i. 12; Isai. xxx. 27; Hos. xi.9). On one occasion in the Septuagint all the words of this group occur together (Jer. xxi. 5). When these words, after a considerable anterior history, came to settle down on the passion of anger, as the strongest of all passions, impulses, and desires (see…
Read the full entry →θυμός, -οῦ, ὁ
(< θύω),
[in LXX most freq. for אַף, also for חֵמָה, חָרוֹן, etc., 30 words in all;]
θυμός, -οὔ, 6, (fr. θύω to rush along or on, be in a heat, breathe violently; hence Plato correctly says, Cratyl. p- 419 e., θυμὸς ἀπὸ τῆς θύσεως x. ζέσεως τῆς ψυχῆς; accordingly it signifies both the spirit panting as it were in the body, and the rage with which the man pants and swells), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. often for ἮΝ anger, and 721 excandescentia; also for 17 ἽΓῚ aestus. In the N. T. 1. passion, angry heat, (excandescentia, Οἷς. Tuse. 4, 9, 21), anger forthwith boiling up and soon subsiding again, (ὀργή, on the other hand, denotes indignation which has arisen gradually and become more settled; [ef. (Plato) deff. 415 6. θυμός: ὁρμὴ βίαιος ἄνευ λογισμοῦ: νόσος τάξεως Ψυχῆς ἀλογίστου. ὀργή" τιμωρεῖσθαι. Greg. Naz. carm. 34 θυμὸς μέν ἐστιν ἀθρόος ζέσις φρενός, ὀργὴ δὲ θυμὸς ἐμμένων, Herm. mand. 5, 2, 4 ἐκ δὲ τῆς πικρίας θυμός, ἐκ δὲ τοῦ θυμοῦ ὀργή; ef. Aristot. rhet. 2, 2, 1 and…
Read the full entry →θυμός is not so common as might have been expected, but it is found in the curious alphabetical acrostic of early i/a.D., P Tebt II. 278%?, where, with reference to the loss of a garment, it is said of the thief—@vpod περιπεσῖτε (/. - εἴται), “he will meet with anger” (Edd.): cf. BGU IV. 1141 Ovyarnp 2 94 θυρεός (B.c. 14) ἐπὶ θυμῶι. So in the new Alexandrian erotic fragment P Grenf 1. 1% (ii/B.c.) γίνωσκε ὅτι θυμὸν ἀνίκητον ἔχω ὅταν ἔρις λάβῃ pe. Add from the inscrr. the early Sy// 231 (the “‘ Gadatas’”’ inscr. translated from a rescript of Darius 1.) δώσω σοι μὴ μεταβαλομένωι πεῖραν ἠδικ[ημέ]νου θ[υἹμοῦ, Michel 1322 A* Δ]ιονύσιον κατα[δ]ῶ καὶ τὴν γλῶτ(τ)αν τὴν κακὴν καὶ τὸν θυμὸν τὸν κακὸν καὶ τὴν ψυχὴν τὴν κακήϊν, and Magn 115(a) (letter of Darius Hystaspes) δώσω σοι . πεῖραν ἠδικη[μέϊνου θυμοῦ. [In P Lond 4235 (B.c. 168) (=I. p. 31) for the editor’s θυμήν, from an apparently new form…
Read the full entry →θυμός (thumos) — wrath.
θῡμός, ὁ,
soul, spirit, as the principle of life, feeling and thought, especially of strong feeling and passion (rightly derived from θύω (B) by [Refs 5th c.BC+]
I. in physical sense, breath, life, θ. ἀπηύρα, ἀφελέσθαι, ἐξαίνυσθαι, ὀλέσαι, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀπὸ δ᾽ ἔπτατο θ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of animals, [Refs], etc.: less frequently in Trag., [Refs 5th c.BC+]
I.2. spirit, strength, τείρετο δ᾽ ἀνδρῶν θ. ὑπ᾽ εἰρεσίης [Refs 8th c.BC+]
I.3. πάτασσε δὲ θ. ἑκάστου each man's heart beat high, [Refs]
II. soul, as shown by the feelings and passions; and so,
II.1. desire or inclination, especially desire for meat and drink, appetite, πιέειν ὅτε θ. ἀνώγοι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; βαλέειν δέ ἑ ἵετο θ[Refs]; θ. ἐποτρύνῃ [τινά] [Refs 8th c.BC+]…
θυμός
thumos
from 2380; passion (as if breathing hard):--fierceness, indignation,
wrath. Compare 5590.
see GREEK for 2380
see GREEK for 5590
θυμός, οῦ, ὁ
n.m.
an outburst of passion, wrath
θυμός thumos 18x
pr. the soul, mind; hence, a strong passion or emotion of the mind; anger, wrath, Lk. 4:28; Acts 19:28; pl. swellings of anger, 2 Cor. 12:20; Gal. 5:20
θυμός θυ_μός, ὁ, θύω2 the soul:
like Lat. anima, the soul, breath, life, θυμὸν ἀπαυρᾶν, ἀφελέσθαι, ἐξελέσθαι, ἐξαίνυσθαι, ὀλέσαι to take away life, Hom.; θυμὸν ἀποπνείειν to expire, Il.; θυμὸν ἀγείρειν to collect oneself, id. Il., etc.; θυμὸς τείρετο καμάτῳ his spirit was wearied by toil, id. Il.
like Lat. animus, the soul, heart; and so,
of desire for meat and drink, ἔπιον θ᾽ ὅσον ἤθελε θυμός id. Il.:—c. inf., βαλέειν δέ ἑ θυμὸς ἀνώγει his heart bade him shoot, id. Il.; ἤθελε θυμῷ he wished in his heart or with all his heart, id. Il.; θυμῷ βουλόμενος wishing with all one's heart, Hdt.; so, ἐκ θυμοῦ φιλέειν Il.:— θυμός ἐστί μοι, θ. γίγνεταί μοι, c. inf., I have a mind to do . . , id. Il., Xen., etc.:—also as the seat of sorrow or joy, χαῖρε δὲ θυμῷ Il.; ἄχνυτο θυμός id.…
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
an'-ger: In the Old Testament, the translation of several Hebrew words, especially of 'aph (lit. "nostril," "countenance"), which is used some 45 times of human, 177 times of Divine, anger (OHL). The word occurs rarely in the New Testament (Mr 3:5; Eph 4:31; Col 3:8; Re 14:10), its place being taken by the word "wrath" (see WRATH). As a translation of words denoting God's "anger," the English word is unfortunate so far as it may seem to imply selfish, malicious or vindictive personal feeling. The anger of God is the response of His holiness to outbreaking sin. Particularly when it culminates in action is it rightly called Has "wrath." The Old Testament doctrine of God's anger…
Anger
The emotion of instant displeasure on account of something evil that presents itself to our view. In itself it is an original susceptibility of our nature, just as love is, and is not necessarily sinful. It may, however, become sinful when causeless, or excessive, or protracted (Matt. 5:22; Eph. 4:26; Col. 3:8). As ascribed to God, it merely denotes his displeasure with sin and with sinners (Ps. 7:11).
A violent emotion of a painful nature, sometimes arising spontaneously upon just occasion, but usually characterized in the Bible as a great sin, Mt 5:22 Eph 4:31 Col 3:8. Even when just, our anger should be mitigated by a due consideration of the circumstances of the offence and the state of mind of the offender; of the folly and ill-results of this passion; of the claims of the gospel, and of our own need of forgiveness from others, but especially from God, Mt 6:15. Anger is in Scripture frequently attributed to God, Mt 7:11 28:20; not that he is liable to those violent emotions which this passion produces, but…
18 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 18 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 179 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ὅταν δὲ ἔμπαλιν ἀφηνιάσῃ καὶ ἀναχαιτίσῃ ὁ θυμὸς καὶ ἡ ἐπιθυμία καὶ τὸν ἡνίοχον, λέγω δὲ τὸν λογισμόν, τῇ βίᾳ τῆς ὁρμῆς κατασύρῃ καὶ ὑποζεύξῃ, ἑκάτερον δὲ πάθος λάβηται τῶν ἡνιῶν, ἀδικία κρατεῖ·
τῆς δʼ οὐ πειθομένης, ἀρκεῖσθαι δʼ αὐτὴν ἀξιούσης, ὅτι τῆς τιμῆς αὐτὴν ἀφέλοιτο τῆς παρὰ τοῦ ἀνδρός, Ῥαχήλα πεπαίνουσα τὸν θυμὸν τῆς ἀδελφῆς παραχωρήσειν αὐτῇ τἀνδρὸς ἔλεγε κοιμησομένου παρʼ αὐτῇ κατʼ ἐκείνην τὴν ἑσπέραν.
οἱ στυγητοὶ καὶ πάσης κακίας πλήρεις εἰς τοσοῦτο ἐξήρισαν θυμοῦ, ὥστε τοὺς ἐν ὁσίᾳ καὶ ἀμώμῳ προθέσει δουλεύοντας τῷ θεῷ εἰς αἰκίαν περιβαλεῖν, μὴ εἰδότες ὅτι ὁ ὕψιστος ὑπέρμαχος καὶ ὑπερασπιστής ἐστιν τῶν ἐν καθαρᾷ συνειδήσει λατρευόντων τῷ…
κη ἐν Κροκοδείλων πόλει τοῦ Ἀρσινοείτου νομοῦ. ὁμολογοῦσιν Λεοντίσκος Λεοντίσκου Πέρσης τῆς ἐπιγονῆς καὶ Θῦμος Μεγακλέους Μακεδὼν τῆς ἐπιγονῆς καὶ Τεσενοῦφις Πετώυτος Ἀρσινοείτης Νικάνδρωι Συρακοσίῳ τῶν Θεοδώρου τῆς β
ἐξ ὧν δότω κατʼ ἔτος μήλων χίλιον καὶ μὲν τῶι πρώτῳ ἔτει τῆς μισθώσεως θύμου πέμπτον δέκατον , ἐπὶ δὲ τὰ λοιπὰ ἔτη δύο κατʼ ἔτος θύμου διπλάσιον μέτρῳ
τῇ κυρίᾳ χαίρειν. ἀσπάζου Παράβολον καὶ μελησάτω σοι περὶ τῶν φοινικίων καὶ μυξαρίων καὶ θύμου. ἀσπάζου Φιλοκλῆν, Σκνίφα, Ἡγεμονίδα. ἔρρωσο.
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
θεός (theos) means 'God' or 'a god' and is used in both singular and plural forms. It refers to the supreme deity in monotheistic contexts, as well as to lesser deities in polytheistic settings. The New Testament frequently employs this term, notably in verses like Matthew 27:46 and Acts 19:37. Some lexicons note its use as a title for rulers or magistrates, reflecting its broader application in ancient texts.
θεός, -οῦ, ὁ, ἡ (Ac 19:37 only; v. M, Pr., 60, 244), late voc., θεέ (Mt 27:46; cf. De 3:24, al.),
[in LXX chiefly for אֱלֹהִים, also for אֵל and other cognate forms, יהוה, etc.;]
a god or deity, God.
In polytheistic sense, a god or deity: Ac 28:6, I Co 8:4, II Th 2:4, al.; pl., Ac. 14:11 19:26, Ga 4:8, al.
Of the one true God;
θεός, -οὔ, ὁ and ἡ, voc. θεέ, once in the N. T., Mt. xxvii. 46; besides in Deut. iii. 24; Judg. [xvi. 28;] xxi. 3; [2 S. vii. 25; Is. xxxviii. 20]; Sir. xxiii. 4; Sap. ix. 1; 3 Mace. vi. 3; 4 Mace. vi. 27; Act. Thom. 44 sq. 57; Eus. h. 6. 2, 23,16; [5, 20,7; vit. Const. 2,55, 1.59]; ef. W. §8, 2 ο.; [B. 12 (11)]; ({on the eight or more proposed derivations see Vaniéek p. 386, who follows Curtius (after Doderlein) p. 513 sqq. in connecting it with a root meaning to supplicate, implore; hence the implored ; per contra cf. Max Miiller, Chips ete. iv. 227 sq.; L. and 8. s. v. fin.]); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 58, ΟΝ and m7; a god, a goddess; 1. a general appellation of deities or divinities: Acts xxviii. 6; 1 Co. viii. 4; 2 Th. ii. 4; once ἡ θεός, Acts xix. 37 G LT Tr WH; θεοῦ φωνὴ καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώπου, Acts xii. 22; ἄνθρωπος ὧν ποιεῖς σεαυτὸν θεόν, Jn. x. 33; plur., of the gods of the…
Read the full entry →θεός. For the application of the title θεός to the Ptolemaic kings it is sufficient to recall Brit. Mus. Inscrr. IV. 1 No. 906% (B.C. 284-273) where a votive offering is dedicated in honour of Πτολεμαίου τοῦ σωτῆρος καὶ θεοῦ, and the description of Ptolemy V. (Epiphanes) on the Rosetta stone—OG/S gol? (B.C. 196) ὑπάρχων θεὸς ἐκ θεοῦ Kal θεᾶς : cf. Deissmann LAE, p. 348 and the full discussion by E. Kornemann ‘‘ Zur Geschichte der antiken Herrscherkulte” in Beztrdge zur alten Geschichte [Klio] i., p. 51 ff. (Leipzig, 1902). The same practice is still more strikingly illustrated in the Imperial period, as when in an inscr. from the Fayum district, dated March 17th, B.c. 24, Augustus is described as θεὸς ἐκ θεοῦ (OG/S 6557), or as when a votive inscr. is addressed to Nero—daya0a(t) θεῶ(ι) (Cos 927): see Deissmann 7s. p. 349. With this may be compared the frequent use for Augustus of the…
Read the full entry →θεός (theos) — God.
θεός, ὁ,
Boeotian dialect θιός, Laconian dialect σιός (see. below), [Refs 5th c.AD+], Cretan dialect θιός [Refs], Doric dialect also θεύς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; vocative (only late) θεός, also θεέ [LXX+NT]; but classical in compound names, Ἀμφίθεε, Τιμόθεε:—God, the Deity, in general sense, both singular and plural (εἰ καὶ ἐπὶ θεοὺς καὶ ἔτι μᾶλλον ἐπὶ θεὸν ἁρμόζει μεταφέρειν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; σὺν θ. εἰρημένον [Refs 5th c.BC+]: so in plural, σύν γε θεοῖσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐ θεῶν ἄτερ pi.[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑπὲρ θεόν against his will,[Refs 4th c.BC+]; θεῶν συνεθελόντων, βουλομένων, [Refs 5th c.BC+]bless you! good heavens! for heaven's sake! [Refs 8th c.BC+]: doubled in poets, θεὸν θεόν τις ἀγλαϊζέτω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θεοί (Cretan dialect θιοί) as an opening formula in Inscrr. (i.e. τύχην ἀγαθὴν διδοῖεν), [Refs].1, etc.: in Prose also with the Article, ὁ θ.…
Read the full entry →θεός
theos
of uncertain affinity; a deity, especially (with 3588) the supreme
Divinity; figuratively, a magistrate; by Hebraism, very:--X exceeding,
God, god(-ly, -ward).
see GREEK for 3588
θεός, οῦ, ὁ
n.f. & n.m.
God, a god
θεός theos 1x
a deity, Acts 7:43; 1 Cor. 8:5; an idol, Acts 7:40; God, the true God, Mt. 3:9, et al. freq.; God, possessed of true godhead, Jn. 1:1; Rom. 9:5; from the Hebrew, applied to potentates, Jn. 10:34, 35; τῷ θεῷ, an intensive term, from the Hebrew, exceedingly, Acts 7:20, and, perhaps, 2 Cor. 10:4
θεός θεός, ὁ, God, Hom., both in general sense, Θεὸς δώσει God will grant, and in particular sense, θεός τις a god; πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Hom.:—things are said to happen σὺν θεῷ, σύν γε θεοῖσιν by the will of God, id. Hom., etc.; οὐκ ἄνευ θεοῦ, Lat. non sine diis, Od.; οὐκ ἄνευθε θεοῦ Il.; οὐ θεῶν ἄτερ Pind.;— ἐκ θεόφι Il.;— ὑπὲρ θεόν against his will, id. Il.;— κατὰ θεόν τινα, Lat. divinitus, Eur.:—as an oath, πρὸς θεῶν by the gods, in God's name, Trag.; θεὸς ἴστω Soph., etc.
θεός as fem. for θεά, θέαινα, a goddess, Hom.; θήλεια θεός Il.; ἡ νερτέρα θ. Proserpine, Soph.; often in oaths, νὴ τὼ θεώ id. Soph.; ναὶ τὼ σιώ, with the Spartans, of Castor and Pollux, Xen.; with the Boeotians, of Amphion and Zethus, id.…
Read the full entry →Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
god ('Elohim, 'El, [`Elyon], Shadday, Yahweh; Theos):
I. INTRODUCTION TO THE GENERAL IDEA
1. The Idea in Experience and in Thought
2. Definition of the Idea
3. The Knowledge of God
4. Ethnic Ideas of God
(1) Animism
(2) Fetishism
(3) Idolatry
(4) Polytheism
(5) Henotheism
(6) Pantheism
(7) Deism
(8) Semitic Monolatry
(9) Monotheism
II. THE IDEA OF GOD IN THE OLD TESTAMENT
1. The Course of Its Development
2. Forms of Its Manifestation
(1) The Face or Countenance of God
(2) The Voice and Word of God
(3) The Glory of God
(4) The Angel of God
(5) The Spirit of God
(6) The Name of God
(7) Occasional Forms
3. The Names of God
(1) Generic
(2) Attributive
(3) Yahweh
4. Pre-prophetic Conceptions of God
(1) Yahweh Alone Is the God of Israel
(a) His Early Worship
(b) Popular Religion
(c) Polytheistic Tendencies
(i) Coordination
(ii) Assimilation
(iii) Disintegration
(d) No Hebrew Goddesses
(e) Human Sacrifices
God
(A.S. and Dutch God; Dan. Gud; Ger. Gott), the name of the Divine Being. It is the rendering (1) of the Hebrew ’El, from a word meaning to be strong; (2) of ’Eloah_, plural _’Elohim. The singular form, Eloah, is used only in poetry. The plural form is more commonly used in all parts of the Bible, The Hebrew word Jehovah (q.v.), the only other word generally employed to denote the Supreme Being, is uniformly rendered in the Authorized Version by “LORD,” printed in small capitals. The existence of God is taken for granted in the Bible. There is nowhere any argument to prove it. He who disbelieves this truth is spoken of as one devoid of understanding (Ps. 14:1).
The arguments generally adduced by theologians in proof of the being of God are:
(1.) The a priori argument, which is the testimony afforded by reason.
(good). Throughout the Hebrew Scriptures two chief names are used for the one true divine Being--ELOHIM, commonly translated God in our version, and JEHOVAH, translated Lord . Elohim is the plural of Eloah (in Arabic Allah); it is often used in the short form EL (a word signifying strength , as in EL-SHADDAI, God Almighty, the name by which God was specially known to the patriarchs. (Genesis 17:1; 28:3; Exodus 6:3) The etymology is uncertain, but it is generally agreed that the primary idea is that of strength, power of effect , and that it properly describes God in that character in which he is exhibited to all men in his works, as the creator, sustainer and supreme governor of the world. The plural form of Elohim has given rise to much discussion. The fanciful idea that it…
This name, the derivation of which is uncertain, we give to that eternal, infinite, perfect, and incomprehensible Being, the Creator of all things, who preserves and governs all by his almighty power and wisdom, and is the only proper object of worship. The proper Hebrew name for God is JEHOVAH, which signifies He is. But the Jews, from a feeling of reverence, avoid pronouncing this name, substituting for it, wherever it occurs in the sacred test, the word ADONAI, Lord; except in the expression, ADONAI JEHOVAH, Lord Jehovah, for which they put, ADONAI ELOHIM, Lord God. This usage, which is not without an element of superstition, is very ancient, dating its origin some centuries before Christ; but there is no good ground for assuming its existence in the days of the inspired Old Testament writers. The proper word for God is ELOHIM, which is plural in its form, being thus used to signify…
1,342 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 14 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,311 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
15 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Counted over the 1,637 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
Τινὲς γὰρ τὸν κόσμον μᾶλλον ἢ τὸν κοσμοποιὸν θαυμάσαντες τὸν μὲν ἀγένητόν τε καὶ ἀίδιον ἀπεφήναντο, τοῦ δὲ θεοῦ πολλὴν ἀπραξίαν ἀνάγνως κατεψεύσαντο, δέον ἔμπαλιν τοῦ μὲν τὰς δυνάμεις ὡς ποιητοῦ καὶ πατρὸς καταπλαγῆναι, τὸν δὲ μὴ πλέον ἀποσεμνῦναι…
ὡς πύργος, ὃν οἱ παῖδες αὐτοῦ ἐφ' ὕβρει τοῦ θεοῦ ᾠκοδόμησαν, καὶ ὡς τὰς φωνὰς αὐτῶν μετέβαλε καὶ ὁ τόπος, ἐν ᾧ τοῦτο γέγονε, Βαβυλὼν ἐκλήθη.
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
αὐτῷ μέρος ἧς ἐμισθώσατο σὺν Πακοίβι Σχώτου καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς
1 βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ καὶ Ἀλεξάνδρου θεοῦ Φιλομήτορος καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεᾶς Φιλαδέλφου ἔτους ἑκκαιδεκάτου ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ
ἡμῖν Φιλόξενος ὁ ἀδελφὸς διʼ ὧν κεκόμικεν ἡμῖν Ὄρσης γραμμάτων περὶ τοῦ τὸν μέγιστον Θεὸν Σωτῆρα βασιλέα ἐπιβεβληκέναι εἰς Μέμφιν, Ἱέρακα δὲ προκεχειρίσθαι μετὰ δυνάμεων μυρίων ἐπὶ καταστολὴν τῆς
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word κεράννυμι (i.e., *kerannymi*) means to mix or mingle, particularly in the context of diluting wine with water. It suggests a blending that forms a compound, unlike a simple intermingling. The New Testament uses it in Revelation to describe the mixing of wine, emphasizing its application in preparing drinks.
κεράννυμι,
[in LXX for מסךְ, Is 5:22, al.;]
to mix, mingle, chiefly of the diluting of wine: Re 18:6; by oxymoron, κεκεράσμενος ἄκρατος, Re 14:10.†
SYN.: μίγνυμι. κ. implies "a mixing of two things, so that they are blended and form a compound, as in wine and water, whereas μ. implies a mixing without such composition, as in two sorts of grain" (LS, s.v. κρᾶσις).
κεράννυμι (κεραννύω) : 1 aor. exépaca; pf. pass. κεκέρασμαι (for the more com. κέκραμαι, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 582; Bitm. Ausf. Sprchl. ii. p. 214; Kriiger § 40 8. v. i. p. 175; [Veitch s. v.]); [fr. Hom. down]; 1. to mix, mingle. 2. to mix wine and water. 3. to pour out for drinking: τινί τι, Rev. xviii. 6 [R.V. mingle]; pass., Rey. xiv. 10; (so Bel and the Dragon 11; Anthol. 11, 137,12). [Comr.: συγ-κεράννυμι.]" [SYN. κεράννυμι, μίγνυμι : in strict usage κερ. Cenotes such a mixing as combines the ingredients into a new compound, chemical mixture; ply. such a mixing as merely blends or intermingles them promiscuously, mechanical mixture.]
κεράννυμι (kerannumi) — to mix.
κεράνν-ῡμι,
also κεραννύω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic dialect κεραίω and κεράω (which see); subjunctive κεραννύω [Refs 5th c.BC+]: imperfect ἐκεράννυν [Refs 2nd c.AD+]future κεράσω [ᾰ] [Refs 4th c.AD+].340D.: aorist ἐκέρᾰσα [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect κέρασσα [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect ἔκρησα [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle, aorist ἐκερᾰσάμην [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect κεράσσατο [Refs 8th c.BC+] —passive, future κραθήσομαι [ᾱ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist ἐκράθην [ᾱ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ἐκρήθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect κέκρᾱμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect κέκρημαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: pluperfect ἐκέκρᾱτο [Refs 7th c.BC+]:—mix, mingle (different from μείγνυμι, see at…
Read the full entry →κεράννυμι
kerannumi
prolonged form of a more primary kerao ker-ah'-o (which is used in
certain tenses); to mingle, i.e. (by implication) to pour out (for
drinking):--fill, pour out. Compare 3396.
see GREEK for 3396
κεράννυμι
v.
I mix, pour out for drinking
κεράννυμι kerannymi 3x
to mix, mingle, drink; to prepare for drinking, Rev. 14:10; 18:6 (2x)*
κεράννυμι κεράω to mix, mingle, (cf. κρᾶσις):
mostly of diluting wine with water, Od., attic;—so in Mid., ὅτε περ οἶνον κέρωνται when they mix their wine, Il.; κρητῆρα κεράσσατο he mixed him a bowl, Od.:—Pass., κύλιξ ἴσον ἴσωι κεκραμένη a cup mixed half and half, Ar.
to temper or cool by mixing, θυμῆρες κεράσασα having mixed (the water) to an agreeable temperature, Od.
generally, to mix, blend, temper, regulate, Lat. tempero, of climates, ὧραι μάλιστα κεκραμέναι most temperate seasons, Hdt.; οὐ γῆρας κέκραται γενεᾶι no old age is mingled with the race, i. e. it knows no old age, Pind.:—of tempers of mind, Plat.
Verb-RPP-GSM — Verb · perfect · passive · participle · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
V-RPP-GSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: peRfect Voice: Passive Mood: Participle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
3 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 3 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
The Greek word ἄκρατος (i.e., *akratos*) means 'unmixed' or 'undiluted,' particularly in reference to wine. It is derived from a negative particle and a presumed root meaning 'to mix.' The term appears in the New Testament in Revelation 14:10, where it describes wine that is pure and without water. The lexicons do not present significant disagreement on its meaning.
ἄκρατος, -ον
(< κεράννυμι),
[in LXX: Ps 75:8 (חֲמַר), Je 25:15 (חֵמָה), III Mac 5:2*;]
unmixed, pure: οἶνος, Re 14:10.†
ἄκρατος, -ov, (κεράννυμι), unmixed, pure: Rev. xiv. 10 (of wine undiluted with water, as freq. in prof. writ. and Jer. xxxii. 1 (xxv. 15)).
ἄκρατος. P Oxy II. 237%ii- 0 (a.p. 186) παρ᾽ ols ἄκρατός ἐστιν 7 τῶν νόμων amotop[{ja, ‘Samongst whom the severity of the law is untempered’”’ (Edd.). It is said to mean “ undiluted’ in MGr: cf. Od. ix. 297 ἄκρητον γάλα.
ἄκρατος (akratos) — undiluted.
ἄκρᾱτος,
Ionic dialect ἄκρητος, ον: (κεράννυμι):
1. of liquids, unmixed, neat, especially of wine, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἄκρητοι σπονδαί drink-offerings of pure wine, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἶνος πάνυ ἄ. very strong, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἶνος ἄκρητος wine without water, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἄκρατος (without οἶνος) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ πολὺς ἄ. ὁλίγ᾽ ἀναγκάζει φρονεῖν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἄκρατον, τό, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; χυμός[Refs 5th c.BC+]. adverb -τως[Refs 5th c.BC+]
2. of any objects, ἄ. σώματα pure, simple bodies, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἄ. μέλαν pure black, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
3. of qualities, pure, absolute, ἄ. νοῦς[Refs 5th c.BC+]. adverb -τως[Refs]
ἄκρατος
akratos
from 1 (as a negative particle) and a presumed derivative of 2767;
undiluted:--without mixture.
see GREEK for 1
see GREEK for 2767
ἄκρατος, ον
Adj
unmixed, undiluted
ἄκρατος akratos 1x
unmixed, unmingled wine, Rev. 14:10*
ἄκρατος κεράννυμι of liquids, unmixed, sheer, of wine, Od.:—esp., οἶνος ἄκρητος wine without water, Lat. merum, Hdt.; and ἄκρατος without (οἶνος), Ar., etc.
metaph., ἄκρ. μέλαν pure black, Theophr.; ἄκρατος νύξ sheer night, Aesch.; ἄκρ. νοῦς pure intellect, Xen.
of conditions or states, pure, untempered, absolute, ἐλευθερία, ἡδονή Plat.; ἄκρ. ψεῦδος a sheer lie, id. Plat.:—adv. -τως absolutely, Luc.
of persons, intemperate, excessive, violent, ἄκρατος ὀργήν Aesch.: so of things we feel, ἄκρ. ὀργή, ἄκρ. καῦμα, etc.
comp. ἀκρατέστερος, Sup. -έστατος (as if from ἀκρατής).
Adj-GSM — Adjective · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
A-GSM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
ἀκράτου γὰρ ἔτι τῆς λογικῆς φύσεως ὑπαρχούσης ἐν ψυχῇ καὶ μηδενὸς ἀρρωστήματος ἢ νοσήματος ἢ πάθους παρεισεληλυθότος, τὰς φαντασίας τῶν σωμάτων καὶ πραγμάτων ἀκραιφνεστάτας λαμβάνων εὐθυβόλους ἐποιεῖτο τὰς κλήσεις, εὖ μάλα στοχαζόμενος τῶν…
καὶ γὰρ ἡ χάρις ἡ παιδικὴ πολλὴ καὶ ἄκρατος περὶ αὐτὸν οὖσα κατεῖχε τοὺς ὁρῶντας.
Τῦβι τέτακται ἐπὶ τὴν ἐν Συήνῃ τράπεζαν ἐφʼ ἧς Ἀμώνιος εἰς τὸ αὐτὸ ἔτος Ἄκρατος μετασχίστης πρεσβύτερος Ψεβχανούβιος τελεσμάτων σιτικῶνἀκροδρύων μετὰ σχιστῆς πρε Ψενχανοῦβις Πελαίου σιτ … ἄνω σ
Πρωτάρχωι παρὰ Σαραπίωνος τοῦ Διοδώρου Ἀλθαιέως καὶ παρὰ Πυλαιμένου τοῦ Ἀκράτου Καίσαρος παρόντος καὶ συνευδοκοῦντος τῇδε τῇ συνχωρήσει Γαίου Ἰουλίου Ἑρμίου … τοῦ δεσπότου Ἀκράτου
Ἀνουβίωνι καὶ Χαιρήμονι βιβλιοφύλαξι ἐνκτήσεων Μεμφείτου παρὰ Σαμέρου τοῦ Ἀκράτου τοῦ Ἀκήους μητρὸς Θαμούνιος τῶν ἀπὸ Μέμφεως. κατὰ τὰ προστεταγμένα ὑπὸ Φλαυίου Τιτιανοῦ τοῦ
The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.
ἐν,
prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).
Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…
Read the full entry →ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…
Read the full entry →ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…
Read the full entry →ἐν (en) — in/on/among.
ἐν,
poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]
__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.
__A WITH DAT.
__A.I OF PLACE,
__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…
ἐν
en
a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or
state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or
constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519
and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +
almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+
all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,
-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,
one, X quickly,
X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),
through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,
with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same
import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate
direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)
preposition.
see GREEK for 1519
see GREEK for 1537
ἐν
Prep.
in, on, among
ἐν en 2x
followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of,
ἐν
e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.
Lat. in.
PREP. WITH DAT.:
OF PLACE
in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.
in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.
in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.
in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.
in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…
2,833 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 36 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,743 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-DSN — Article · dative · singular · neuterdative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
T-DSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word ποτήριον (poterion) means a drinking cup or wine cup, derived from ποτήρ (potēr). It is used in the New Testament to refer to both the physical vessel and its contents, often in a metaphorical sense related to divine experiences, such as suffering or blessings. The word appears in various contexts, including the Eucharist and references to God's providence.
ποτήριον, -ου, τό, dimin. of ποτήρ
(< πίνω),
[in LXX chiefly for כּוֹס;]
a wine cup: Mt 23:25, 26 26:27, Mk 7:4 14:23, Lk 11:39 22:17, 20a (WH, R, mg., om.), I Co 11:25, Re 17:4; πίνειν ἐκ τοῦ π., I Co 11:28; c. gen. rei, Mt 10:42, Mk 9:41; τ. εὐλογίας, I Co 10:16; by meton., of the contents of the cup, Lk 22:20b (WH, R, mg., om.), I Co 11:25, 26; c. gen. pers., I Co 10:21 11:27.…
ποτήριον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of ποτήρ), a cup, a drinking vessel; a. prop.: Mt. xxiii. 25 sq.; xxvi. 27; Mk. vi. 4, 8 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.]; xiv. 23; Lk. xi. 39; xxii. 17, 20; 1 Co. xi. 25; Rev. xvii. 4; πίνειν ἐκ τοῦ ποτηρίου, 1 Co. xi. 28; τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας (see εὐλογία, 4), 1 Co. x. 16; with agen. of the thing with which the cup is filled: ψυχροῦ, Mt. x. 42; ὕδατος, Mk. ix. 41; by meton. of the container for the contained, the contents of the cup, what is offered to be drunk, Lk. xxii. 20
ποτήριον. P Tebt I. 657 (B.c. 140-139) φιάλας καὶ ποτήρια, ‘bowls and cups,” P Ryl 11. 127%! (A.D. 29) ποτήρια κασσιδί(έρινα) B, “2 drinking-cups of tin,” P Fay 12712 (ii/iii a.p.) pik
ποτήριον (potērion) — cup.
ποτήριον, τό,
drinking-cup, wine-cup, [Refs 7th c.BC+]; οὔποτ᾽ ἐκ ταὐτοῦ μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν πίεται π.[Refs 2nd c.AD+]
2. the Cup in the Eucharist, [NT]
3. jar, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
4. receptacle for offerings in temples, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]
II. absorbent preparation, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
III. see at {ποτίρριον}.
ποτήριον
poterion
neuter of a derivative of the alternate of 4095; a drinking-vessel; by
extension, the contents thereof, i.e. a cupful (draught);
figuratively, a lot or fate:--cup.
see GREEK for 4095
ποτήριον, ου, τό
n.n.
a drinking cup
ποτήριον potērion 31x
a vessel for drinking, cup, Mt. 10:42; 23:25, 26; meton. the contents of a cup, liquor contained in a cup, Lk. 22:20; 1 Cor. 10:16; from the Hebrew, the cup or potion of what God’s administration deals out, Mt. 20:22, 23; Rev. 14:10
ποτήριον ποτήριον, ου, τό, ΠΟ, Root of some tenses of πίνω a drinking-cup, wine-cup, Hdt., attic
Noun-DSN — Noun · dative · singular · neuterdative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
N-DSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
(Most frequently, koc; four other words in one passage each; poterion): A vessel for drinking from, of a variety of material (gold, silver, earthenware), patterns (Es 1:7) and elaboration.
Figurative: By ordinary figure of speech, put sometimes for the contents of the cup, namely, for that which is drunk (Mt 26:39). In both Old Testament and New Testament applied figuratively to that which is portioned out, and of which one is to partake; most frequently used of what is sorrowful, as God's judgments, His wrath, afflictions, etc. (Ps 11:6; 75:8; Isa 51:17; Re 14:10). In a similar sense, used by Christ concerning the…
Cup
A wine-cup (Gen. 40:11, 21), various forms of which are found on Assyrian and Egyptian monuments. All Solomon’s drinking vessels were of gold (1 Kings 10: 21). The cups mentioned in the New Testament were made after Roman and Greek models, and were sometimes of gold (Rev. 17:4).
The art of divining by means of a cup was practiced in Egypt (Gen. 44:2-17), and in the East generally.
The “cup of salvation” (Ps. 116:13) is the cup of thanksgiving for the great salvation. The “cup of consolation” (Jer. 16:7) refers to the custom of friends sending viands and wine to console relatives in mourning (
The cups of the Jews, whether of metal or earthenware, were possibly borrowed, in point of shape and design, from Egypt and from the Phoenicians, who were celebrated in that branch of workmanship. Egyptian cups were of various shapes, either with handles or without them. In Solomon’s time all his drinking vessels were of gold, none of silver. (1 Kings 10:21) Babylon is compared to a golden cup. (Jeremiah 51:7) The great laver, or "sea," was made with a rim like the rim of a cup (cos), with flowers of lilies," (1 Kings 7:26) a form which the Persepolitan cups resemble. The cups of the New Testament were often no doubt formed on Greek and Roman models. They were sometimes of gold. (
This word is taken in Scripture both in a proper and in a figurative sense. In a proper sense, it signifies a common cup, of horn, or some precious metal, Ge 40:13 44:2 1Ki 7:26, such as is used for drinking out of at meals; or a cup of ceremony, used at solemn and religious meals-as at the Passover, when the father of the family pronounced certain blessings over the cup, and having tasted it, passed it round to the company and his whole family, who partook of it, 1Co 10:16. In a figurative sense, a cup is spoken of as filled with the portion given to one by divine providence, Ps 11:6 16:5; with the blessings of life and of grace,
33 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 31 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 26 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
καὶ ἔλαβον τὴν σταφυλὴν καὶ ἐξέθλιψα αὐτὴν εἰς τὸ ποτήριον, καὶ ἔδωκα τὸ ποτήριον εἰς τὰς χεῖρας Φαραώ“ (Gen.
βουλόμενος δὲ πεῖσαι καὶ παραστῆσαι τοῖς παρατυγχάνουσιν ὁ Ἐλεάζαρος, ὅτι ταύτην ἔχει τὴν ἰσχύν, ἐτίθει μικρὸν ἔμπροσθεν ἤτοι ποτήριον πλῆρες ὕδατος ἢ ποδόνιπτρον καὶ τῷ δαιμονίῳ προσέταττεν ἐξιὸν τἀνθρώπου ταῦτα ἀνατρέψαι καὶ παρασχεῖν ἐπιγνῶναι…
πρῶτον περὶ τοῦ ποτηρίου: Εὐχαριστοῦμέν σοι, πάτερ ἡμῶν, ὑπὲρ τῆς ἁγίας ἀμπέλου Δαυεὶδ τοῦ παιδός σου, ἦς ἐγνώρισας ἡμῖν διὰ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ παιδός σου: σοὶ ἡ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
λόγος δαπάνης κοινῆς ὑποκειμένων Τρύ … φωνι ὡς εἰς βιβλιοθήκην διʼ Ἀντιγόνωι δραχμὰς φ ποτηρίων καὶ ἡμικυτυλῶν δραχμὰς τμ … ουθδα δραχμὰς ξγ … Ἀλεξάνδρη παιδα῾ρί ?̓ Ἀπελλᾷ σ
ἀπὸ Εὐημερίας τῆς Θεμίστου μερίδος ὑπὲρ ὧν ἤροσάν μου ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας λῃστρικῷ τρόπωι ποτηρίων κασσιτερίνων καὶ κελλίβατος καὶ ἄλλων σκευῶν καὶ ἀργυρίου δραχμῶν ξ ὕβριν μοι συνεστήσατο οὐ
τοῦ Θέωνος μετὰ τὴν τελευτὴν τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ Ἰσᾶτος δραχμῶν τεσσαράκοντα , μεγάλην κίστην χαλκοῦν, ποτήριον κασσιτέρινον ἓν καὶ ἀργυρίου ἓν , κερβικάριον … νον
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · femininegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
ov:
(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.
OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]
1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.
I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.
For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.
It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.
Lamentations 3:1.
The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.
Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.
That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.
Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word ὀργή (orgē) means anger, wrath, or passion. It is derived from a root meaning to swell or teem, indicating an internal agitation. In the New Testament, it describes both human anger and the divine reaction against sin, appearing in verses like Mark 3:5 and Romans 1:18. Lexicons note that it differs from θυμός (thymos), which refers to a more transient emotional state.
Θυμός and ὀργή are found several times together in the N. T. (as at Rom. ii. 8; Ephes. iv. 31; Col. iii. 8; Rev. xix. 15); often also in the Septuagint (Ps. lxxvii. 49; Dan. iii. 13; Mic. v. 15), and often also in other Greek (Plato, Philebus, 47 6; Polybius, vi. 56. 11; Josephus, Antt. xx. 5. 3; Plutarch, De Coh. Ird, 2; Lucian, De Cal. 23); nor are they found only in the connexion of juxtaposition, but one made dependent on the other; thus θυμὸς τῆς ὀργῆς (Rev. xvi. 19; ef. Job iii. 17; Josh. vii. 26); while ὀργὴ θυμοῦ, not occurring in the N. T., is frequent in the Old (2 Chron. xxix. 10; Lam. i. 12; Isai. xxx. 27; Hos. xi.9). On one occasion in the Septuagint all the words of this group occur together (Jer. xxi. 5). When these words, after a considerable anterior history, came to settle down on the passion of anger, as the strongest of all passions, impulses, and desires (see…
Read the full entry →ὀργή, -ῆς, ἡ,
[in LXX chiefly for אַף, also for חָרוֹן, חֵמָה, קֶצֶף, etc.;]
impulse, propensity, disposition.
anger, wrath;
ὀργή, -ῆς, 7, (fr. ὀργάω to teem, denoting an internal motion, esp. that of plants and fruits swelling with juice [Curtius § 152]; ef. Lat. turgere alicui for irasci alicui in Plaut. Cas. 2, 5,17; Most. 8, 2,10; οἵ. Germ. arg, Aerger), in Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod down the natural disposition, temper, character; movement or agitation of soul, impulse, desire, any violent emotion, but esp. (and chiefly in Attic) anger. In bibl. Grk. anger, wrath, indignation, (on the distinction between it and θυμός, see θυμός, 1): Eph. iv. 31; Col. iii. 8; Jas.i.19sq.; μετ᾽ ὀργῆς, indignant, [A. V. with anger], Mk. iii. 5; χωρὶς ὀργῆς, 1 Tim. ii. 8; anger exhibited in punishing, hence used for the punishment itself (Dem. or. in Mid. § 43): of the punishments inflicted by magistrates, Ro. xiii.4; διὰ τὴν ὀργήν, i. 6. because disobedience is visited with punishment, ib. 5. The ὀργή attributed to God in the N.…
Read the full entry →ὀργή ‘“suddenly I open my eyes and see the twins in the school of Tothes,”’ 26. 441} (B.C. 153) ἐγὼ yap ἐνύπνια ὁρῶ πονηρά, followed by βλέπω Μενέδημον κατατρέχοντά pe, and 20. 45° (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski*, p. 85) ὁρῶ ἐν τῴ ὕπνῳ τὸν δραπέδην Μενέδημον ἀντικείμενον ἡμῖν. See also P Leid Wii. 26 (ji/ili A.D.) oé, τὸν αὐτογέννητον θεόν, τὸν πάντα (= δρῶντα καὶ πάντα ἀκούοντα, καὶ μὴ ὁρώμενον, and the iv/A.D. Christian sepulchral inser., P Hamb I. 225 Y]iz θεοῦ μεγάλοιο τὸν οὐδέποτ᾽ ἔδρακεν ἀνήρ: cf. Jn 115, I Tim 615: The meaning ‘‘see” with the mind, ‘‘perceive,’’ ‘‘ discern,” may be traced in such exx. as P Hib I. 444 (B.c. 253) ὁρῶντες δέ σε καταραθυμοῦντα Suny ϑεῖν kal νῦν ἐπιστεῖλαί σοι, ““Ῥαΐ seeing that you are negligent I thought it my duty to send to you instructions again now’ (Edd.), BGU IV. 1078" (A.D. 39) λοιπὸν οὖν, ἐὰν λάβω τὰ κερμάμια (/. κεράμια or κερμάτια), ὄψομαι, τί με…
Read the full entry →ὀργή (orgē) — wrath.
ὀργή, ἡ,
natural impulse or propensity (see. ὀργάω II): hence, temperament, disposition, mood, κηφήνεσσι κοθούροις εἴκελος ὀργήν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; so μείλιχος, γλυκεῖα ὀργά, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὠμή, ἀτέραμνος ὀργή, [Refs]; ὀργῆς νοσούσης εἰσὶν ἰατροὶ λόγοι of 'a mind diseased', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀστυνόμοι ὀργαί social dispositions, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also in Prose, διεπειρᾶτο αὐτῶν τῆς τε ἀνδραγαθίης καὶ τῆς ὀργῆς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐπιφέρειν ὀργάς τινι suit one's moods to another, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II. anger, wrath, ὀργῇ χρῆσθαι to be in a passion, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὀργῇ εἶξαι, χαρίζεσθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+] involves anger, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν…
ὀργή
orge
from 3713; properly, desire (as a reaching forth or excitement of the
mind), i.e. (by analogy), violent passion (ire, or (justifiable)
abhorrence); by implication punishment:--anger, indignation,
vengeance, wrath.
see GREEK for 3713
ὀργή, ῆς, ἡ
n.f.
anger, wrath, passion
ὀργή ὀργη, ἡ,
natural impulse or propension: one's temper, temperament, disposition, nature, Hes., Theogn., etc.; ἀλωπέκων ὀργαῖς ἴκελοι Pind.; ὀργαὶ ἀστυνόμοι social dispositions, Soph.; πρὸς τὰ παρόντα τὰς ὀργὰς ὁμοιοῦν Thuc., etc.
passion, anger, wrath, Hdt., Soph., etc.; ὀργῇ χάριν δοῦναι Soph.; ὀργῇ εἴκειν Eur.; δι᾽ ὀργῆς ἔχειν τινά Thuc.; ἐν ὀργῇ ἔχειν or ποιεῖσθαί τινα id. Thuc., etc.
Adverbial usages, ὀργῇ, in anger, Hdt., etc.; so, δι᾽ ὀργῆς, ἐξ ὀργῆς, κατ᾽ ὀργήν Soph.; μετ᾽ ὀργῆς Plat.
Πανὸς ὀργαί panic fears (i. e. terrors sent by Pan), Eur.:—but, ὀργή τινος anger against a person or at a thing, Soph.; ἱερῶν ὀργάς wrath at or because of the rites…
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · femininegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
→ (Anger, judgment, punishment)
→ See ANGER
→ See GOD, ANGER OF
→ See JUDGMENT
→ See PUNISHMENT, DIVINE
→ See PUNISHMENT, ETERNAL
36 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 36 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 154 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἐφ’ ᾧ τὸν πατέρα χαλεπήναντα — ἡ γὰρ πρᾶξις ὀργῆς ἀξία, ἐπεὶ παρελθόντες τὸ ζωῆς ἀθανάτου φυτόν, τὴν ἀρετῆς παντέλειαν, ὑφ’ ἧς μακραίωνα καὶ εὐδαίμονα βίον ἐδύναντο καρποῦσθαι, τὸν ἐφήμερον καὶ θνητὸν οὐ βίον ἀλλὰ χρόνον κακοδαιμονίας μεστὸν εἵλοντο…
τῆς μὲν οὖν ἐπὶ τῷ φόνῳ τιμωρίας αὐτὸν ἠφίει θυσίαν ἐπιτελέσαντα καὶ διʼ αὐτῆς ἱκετεύσαντα μὴ λαβεῖν ὀργὴν αὐτῷ χαλεπωτέραν, ἐπάρατον δʼ αὐτὸν ἐτίθει καὶ τοὺς ἐγγόνους αὐτοῦ τιμωρήσεσθαι κατὰ τὴν ἑβδόμην ἠπείλησε γενεάν, καὶ τῆς γῆς αὐτὸν ἐκείνης…
ἐπικάλεσαι δέ, εἴ τίς σοι ὑπακούσεται, ἤ εἴ τινα ἁγίων ἀγγέλων ὄψῃ: καὶ γὰρ ἄφρονα ἀναιρεῖ ὀργή.
οὐκ ἐδυνάμην γὰρ ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης ἡμέρας ἀποστείλῃ τὸ δικότυλον ἐλαίου ἀλλὰ ὀργή με ἔλαβε ὅτι ἔπεμψας Μάξιμον καὶ … … εκπρασταμυ
εἰ μὴ μόνον περὶ τοῦ ὄνου Καρᾶτος. ὑμεῖς δὲ ἐφάνητέ με καιροτηροῦσαι καὶ εἰ ὀργή τις ἔνι ἐν τῷ με μηδὲν παραπέμψασθαι ἀκούσαντα, ἰδοὺ ἐπλήγην ὑπὸ ἵππου καὶ ἐκινδύνευσα
σὺν Ἀντωνίῳ τῷ προγεγραμμένῳ ἀδελφῷ … … τούτου καὶ τῆς περὶ αὐτὸν ἀμέτρου ὀργῆς … … σας· εἰς δὲ ἀπόδειξιν ὅτι κακοῦ βίου ε … … … -ηγήσαντος
αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.
αὐτός, -ή, -ό,
determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).
Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);
self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…
αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…
Read the full entry →αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…
Read the full entry →αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.
αὐτός
(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),
I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…
αὐτός
autos
from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea
of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used
(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the
proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,
the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-
)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,
- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),
those, together, very, which. Compare 848.
see GREEK for 109
see GREEK for 1438
see GREEK for 848
αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό
Pers.pr.
he, she, it, they, them, same
αὐτός autos 5x
self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1
αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:
oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.
of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.
by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.
in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.
Pron-GSM — Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
P-GSM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.
πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…
Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος
ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
βασανίζω (basanizō) is derived from the word for touchstone (βάσανος) and primarily means to test or examine, often through torture or torment. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as affliction and distress (e.g., Matthew 8:6, 14:24). The entries indicate a range of meanings from physical torture to metaphorical distress, with some lexicons noting its use in examining genuineness.
βασανίζω (basanizō) — to torture: torture.
βᾰσᾰν-ίζω,
Attic dialect future -ῐῶ[Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist ἐβασάνισα, subjunctive βασανίσω variant in [Refs] —passive, aorist ἐβασανίσθην: perfect βεβασάνισμαι:—rub upon the touch-stone (βάσανος), χρυσόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: hence, put to the test, prove, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; investigate scientifically, [Refs 5th c.BC+] of the instances used in inductive inference, ἀπὸ τῶν πανταχόθεν βεβασανισμένων [μεταβαίνομεν] [Refs 1st c.BC+]
II. of persons, examine closely, cross-question, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; βεβασανισμένος εἰς δικαιοσύνην having his love of justice put to the test, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑπὸ δακρύων βασανίζεσθαι, i.e. to be convicted of being painted by tears (washing off the cosmetic), [Refs 5th…
βασανίζω
basanizo
from 931; to torture:--pain, toil, torment, toss, vex.
see GREEK for 931
βασανίζω
v.
I torment, torture, buffet
βασανίζω to rub gold upon the touch-stone (βάσανος), Plat.: hence, to try the genuineness of a thing, to put to the test, make proof of, id. Plat.
of persons, to examine closely, cross-question, Hdt., Ar.
to question by applying torture, to torture, id. Ar.:—Pass. to be put to the torture, for the purpose of extorting confession, Thuc.: to be tormented by disease or storm, NTest.
Verb-FPI-3S — Verb · future · passive · indicative · third person · singularfuture passive indicative — an action still to come.
V-FPI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Future Voice: Passive Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular
12 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 12 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
στοχασταὶ γὰρ πάντες οὗτοι πιθανῶν καὶ εἰκότων, ἄλλοτε ἄλλας ἀπὸ τῶν αὐτῶν φαντασίας λαμβάνοντες, διὰ τὸ μήτε τὰ ὑποκείμενα φύσιν ἔχειν πάγιον μήτε τὴν διάνοιαν ἀκριβῆ βάσανον περιπεποιῆσθαι, ᾗ βασανισθήσεται τὰ δόκιμα.
Τοῦ δὲ Φαραώθου μηδʼ οὕτως εἴκοντος τοῖς τοῦ θεοῦ βουλήμασιν, ἀλλὰ τὰς μὲν γυναῖκας συναπαίρειν τοῖς ἀνδράσιν ἀξιοῦντος καταλείπεσθαι δὲ τοὺς παῖδας, οὐκ ἠπόρει τὸ θεῖον τὴν πονηρίαν αὐτοῦ ποικίλοις κακοῖς καὶ μείζοσι τῶν προενδεδημηκότων…
βασανιζόμενος οὖν καὶ τιμωρούμενος ὅλον τὸν ἐνιαυτόν, μνημονεύει τότε τῆς τρυφῆς καὶ ἀπάτης καὶ γινώσκει, ὅτι δἰ αὐτὰ πάσχει τὰ πονηρά.
οὖν διὰ τὸν θεόν, ἐπειδὴ πάνυ στρεβλοῦμαι ταύτης ἕνεκεν τῆς προφάσεως, ἵνα μὴ ἀποθάνω βασανιζόμενος. καὶ γὰρ ἔλεγεν ὅτι ἤδη ἀνεδέξατο αὐτοὺς ἀποκρότως ἡ σὴ ἀρετή. ἀπέστειλα δέ σοι
καὶ τοὺς Πέρσας ἦλθον εἰς Τήνιν ᾖσαν καὶ ἐξήνεγκόν με εἰς τὸ Φωσσᾶτον καὶ ἐβασάνισάν με ἀπὸ ὀξιδίου καὶ μαρμάρων εἰς τὸ στόμα καὶ εἰς τὴν ῥῖνα καὶ ἀπέθανον
κώμης Ἀφροδιτώ. οὐκ ἔστιν τὸ σύνολον οὐδὲν ἄλλο βασανιστήριον ἀνίατον καὶ ἀργὸν ἀποδεικνῦον τὸν βασανιζόμενον χείρω τοῦ λεπταρίου μετὰ καὶ ὀξιδίου. διὰ τοῦτο κελεύομεν μετὰ τὴν ἀπόλυσιν τῶν παρόντων
The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.
ἐν,
prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).
Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…
Read the full entry →ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…
Read the full entry →ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…
Read the full entry →ἐν (en) — in/on/among.
ἐν,
poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]
__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.
__A WITH DAT.
__A.I OF PLACE,
__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…
ἐν
en
a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or
state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or
constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519
and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +
almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+
all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,
-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,
one, X quickly,
X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),
through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,
with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same
import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate
direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)
preposition.
see GREEK for 1519
see GREEK for 1537
ἐν
Prep.
in, on, among
ἐν en 2x
followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of,
ἐν
e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.
Lat. in.
PREP. WITH DAT.:
OF PLACE
in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.
in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.
in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.
in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.
in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…
2,833 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 36 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,743 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
πῦρ, gen. πυρός, is a Greek noun meaning 'fire.' It appears frequently in the New Testament, often symbolizing divine judgment or trials, as seen in verses like Mark 9:22 and 1 Corinthians 3:13. The word can also refer to hellfire, with specific references in Matthew 18:8 and Revelation 20:10. It has metaphorical uses, such as describing the tongue in James 3:5.
πῦρ, gen. πυρός, τό, [prob. fr. Skr. pu ‘to purify’ (cf. Germ. feuer); Vaniéek p. 541; Curtius § 385], fr. Hom. down; Hebr. wx; fire: Mt. iii. 10, 12; vii.19; xvii. 15; Mk. ix. 22; Lk. iii. 9,17; ix. 54; Jn. xv.6; Actsii. 19; xxviii. 5; 1 Co. iii. 13; Heb. xi. 34; Jas. 111. 5; v. 3; Rev. Cob OAS ths 17. 18. sau Bie ἈΠ|:15.; Sahig 8» Soe PIF Sap 8; xx. 9; ἅπτειν πῦρ, to kindle a fire, Lk. xxii. 55 [T Tr txt. WH περιάπτ.]; ἔβρεξε πῦρ καὶ θεῖον, Lk. xvii. 29; κατακαίειν τι ev ['T om. WH br. ἐν] πυρί, Rev. xvii. 16; xvili. 8; καίομαι πυρί, Mt. xiii. 40 [R LT WH κατακ.]; Heb. xii. 18 [W. § 31, 7 d.]; Rev. viii. 8; xxi. 8; φλὸξ πυρός, a fiery flame or flame of fire, Acts vii. 30; 2 Th. i. 8 Ltxt. Trtxt.; Heb. i. 7; Rev. i.14; ii.18; xix. 12, (Ex. iii. 2 cod. Alex.; Is. xxix.6); mip φλογός, a flaming fire or fire of flame, 2 Th. i.8 RGLmrg. T Trmre. WH (Ex. iii. 2 cod. Vat.; Sir. xlv. 19)…
Read the full entry →πῦρ (pur) — fire.
πῦρ
(once πύυρ [?~X ¯ ?~X] by 'distraction', [Refs 4th c.BC+]; not used in plural, see at {πυρά},{τά}:—fire, π. καίειν or δαίειν to kindle fire, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; π. ἀνακαίειν, ἅπτειν, ἐξάπτειν, αἴθειν, ἐναύειν, (see entry).; π. ποιεῖν, ποιήσασθαι, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; π. ἐμβαλεῖν νηυσί, κλισίῃσι, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; π. φυσητέον, ῥιπίζειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__b π. τεχνικόν, see at {τεχνικός}.
2. funeral-fire (compare πυρά), ὄφρα πυρός με.. λελάχωσι θανόντα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ζῶντα διδόναι τινὰ πυρί burn one alive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
3. sacrificial fire, ἐν πυρὶ βάλλε θυηλάς [Refs 8th c.BC+]
πῦρ
pur
a primary word; "fire" (literally or figuratively, specially,
lightning):--fiery, fire.
πῦρ, πυρός, τό
n.n.
fire, trials
πῦρ pyr 71x
fire, Mt. 3:10; 7:19; 13:40, et al. freq.; πυρός, used by Hebraism with the force of an adjective, fiery, fierce, Heb. 10:27; fire used figuratively to express various circumstances of severe trial, Lk. 12:49; 1 Cor. 3:13; Jude 23
πῦρ not used in pl. v. πυρά fire, Hom., etc.; πῦρ καίειν or δαίειν to kindle fire, id. Hom.; πῦρ ἀνακαίειν, ἅπτειν, ἐξάπτειν, αἴθειν, ἐναύειν, v. sub vocc.; πῦρ ἐμβάλλειν νηυσί Il.
the funeral-fire (cf. πυρά), id. Il.
the fire of the hearth, πυρὶ δέχεσθαί τινα Eur.; π. ἄσβεστον or ἀθάνατον the fire of Vesta in the Prytaneion, Plut.
as a symbol of things irresistible or terrible, μάρναντο δέμας πυρὸς αἰθομένοιο they were fighting like burning fire, Il.; κρεῖσσον ἀμαιμακέτου πυρός Soph.; διὰ πυρὸς ἰέναι (as we say) to go through fire and water, Xen.; but, διὰ πυρὸς ἦλθε ἑτέρῳ λέκτρῳ she raged furiously against the other partner of the bed, Eur.:—of persons, ὦ πῦρ σύ Soph.:—rarely as an image of warmth and comfort…
Noun-DSN — Noun · dative · singular · neuterdative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
N-DSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
fir ('esh; pur):
These are the common words for fire, occurring very frequently. 'Ur, "light" (Isa 24:15 the King James Version; compare the Revised Version (British and American); Isa 31:9, and see FIRES), nur (Aramaic) (Da 3:22 ff) are found a few times, also 'eshshah (Jer 6:29), and be`erah (Ex 22:6), once each. Ac 28:2,3 has pura, "pyre," and Mr 14:54; Lu 22:56, phos, "light," the Revised Version (British and American) "in the light (of the fire)." "To set…
Fire
(1.) For sacred purposes. The sacrifices were consumed by fire (Gen. 8:20). The ever-burning fire on the altar was first kindled from heaven (Lev. 6:9, 13; 9:24), and afterwards rekindled at the dedication of Solomon’s temple (2 Chr. 7:1, 3). The expressions “fire from heaven” and “fire of the Lord” generally denote lightning, but sometimes also the fire of the altar was so called (Ex. 29:18; Lev. 1:9; 2:3; 3:5, 9).
Fire for a sacred purpose obtained otherwise than from the altar was called “strange fire” (Lev. 10:1, 2;
is represented as the symbol of Jehovah’s presence and the instrument of his power, in the way either of approval or of destruction. (Exodus 3:2; 14:19) etc. There could not be a better symbol for Jehovah than this of fire, it being immaterial, mysterious, but visible, warming, cheering, comforting, but also terrible and consuming. Parallel with this application of fire and with its symbolical meaning are to be noted the similar use for sacrificial purposes and the respect paid to it, or to the heavenly bodies as symbols of deity, which prevailed among so many nations of antiquity, and of which the traces are not even now extinct; e.g. the Sabean and Magian systems of worship. (Isaiah 27:9) Fire for sacred purposes obtained elsewhere than from the altar was called "strange fire," and for the use of such Nadab and Abihu were punished…
In Scripture, is often connected with the presence of Jehovah; as in the burning bush, and on Mount Sinai, Ex 3:2 19:18 Ps 18:1-50 Hab 1:1-3:19. The second coming of Christ will be "in flaming fire," 2Th 1:8. In the New Testament it illustrates the enlightening, cheering, and purifying agency of the Holy Spirit, Mt 3:11 Ac 2:3. By sending fire from heaven to consume sacrifices, God often signified his acceptance of them: as in the case of Abel, Ge 4:4; Abraham, Ge…
74 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 71 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 246 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
συγκέκραται γὰρ ἐκ τῶν αὐτῶν, γῆς καὶ ὕδατος καὶ ἀέρος καὶ πυρός, ἑκάστου τῶν στοιχείων εἰσενεγκόντος τὸ ἐπιβάλλον μέρος πρὸς ἐκπλήρωσιν αὐταρκεστάτης ὕλης, ἣν ἔδει λαβεῖν τὸν δημιουργόν, ἵνα τεχνιτεύσῃ τὴν ὁρατὴν ταύτην εἰκόνα·
ὑπὲρ δὲ τοῦ μὴ διαφυγεῖν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους τὰ ηὑρημένα μηδὲ πρὶν εἰς γνῶσιν ἐλθεῖν φθαρῆναι, προειρηκότος ἀφανισμὸν Ἀδάμου τῶν ὅλων ἔσεσθαι τὸν μὲν κατʼ ἰσχὺν πυρὸς τὸν ἕτερον δὲ κατὰ βίαν καὶ πλῆθος ὕδατος, στήλας δύο ποιησάμενοι τὴν μὲν ἐκ πλίνθου…
Διὰ φιλοξενίαν καὶ εὐσέβειαν Λὼτ ἐσώθη ἐκ Σοδόμων, τῆς περιχώρου πάσης κριθείσης διὰ πυρὸς καὶ θείου, πρόδηλον ποιήσας ὁ δεσπότης, ὅτι τοὺς ἐλπίζοντας ἐπ’ αὐτὸν οὐκ ἐγκαταλείπει, τοὺς δὲ ἑτεροκλινεῖς ὑπάρχοντας εἰς κόλασιν καὶ αἰκισμὸν τίθησιν.
τριβῆς καὶ σήψεως, πλὴν ἐὰν μή τι βίαιον ἐκ θεοῦ γένηται κατὰ χειμῶνα ἢ πυρὸς ἀπὸ γῆς πάθῃ τὸ πλοῖον ἢ ὑπὸ πολεμίων ἢ λῃστῶν περισπασθῇ ὃ καὶ συμφανὲς
χλωρῶν οὔπω οὐδέν. παρακαλῶ σε γράψαι μοι περὶ τῆς ὑγιείας σου. οὐ προχωρεῖ ὁ πυρὸς εἰ μὴ ἐκ δραχμῶν ἑπτά . ἔρρωσο καὶ παρακληθεὶς συνεχῶς ἡμῖν γράφε περὶ τῆς
μὲν φοίνικας ἀπὸ συνκομιδῆς καρπῶν, τὸ δὲ ἔδαφος ἀπὸ συγκομιδῆς τῶν σπαρησομένων, τὸν δὲ πυρ… … … … ἐὰν φαίνηται μισθῶσαι ἐπὶ τούτοις
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
The Greek word θεῖον (theion) means 'brimstone' or 'sulfur.' It is derived from the neuter form of an adjective related to burning, indicating its use in purification and fumigation. The New Testament references it in contexts associated with divine judgment, particularly in the Book of Revelation and the Gospel of Luke.
θεῖον, -ov, τό, (apparently the neut. of the adj. θεῖος i. qdivine incense, because burning brimstone was regarded as having power to purify, and to ward off contagion [but Curtius § 320 allies it w. θύω : ef. Lat. fumus, Eng. dust]), brimstone : Lk. xvii. 29; Rev. ix. 17 sq.; xiv. 10; xix. 20; [xx.10]; xxi. 8. (Gen. xix. 24; Ps. x. (xi.) 6; Ezek. xxxviii. 22; Hom. Il. 16, 228; Od. 22, 481, 493; (Plat.) Tim. Locr. p. 99 ¢.; Ael. v. h. 13, 15[16]; Hdian. 8, 4, 26 [9 ed. Bekk.].)
θεῖον (theion) — sulfur.
θεῖον,
__AEpic dialect θέειον (in [Refs 8th c.BC+] θήϊον), τό, brimstone, used to fumigate and purify, δέπας.. ἐκάθηρε θεείῳ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δεινὴ δὲ θεείου γίγνεται ὀδμή, from a thunderbolt, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν δὲ θεείου πλῆτο, of a ship struck by lightning, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐμβαλόντες πῦρ ξὺν θ. [LXX+5th c.BC+]; as a natural product, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to πεπυρωμένον, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; compare θεάφιον, θέαφος. (Perh. cognate with θύω, θυμιάω, Latin suffire.)
θεῖον
theion
probably neuter of 2304 (in its original sense of flashing);
sulphur:--brimstone.
see GREEK for 2304
θεῖον, ου, τό
n.n.
brimstone, sulfur
Noun-DSN — Noun · dative · singular · neuterdative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
N-DSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
brim'-ston, brim'-stun (gophrith; to theion): The word translated "brimstone" probably referred originally to the pitch of trees, like the cypress. By analogy it has been rendered "brimstone" because of the inflammability of both substances. Sulphur existed in Palestine in early times and was known by most of the ancient nations as a combustible substance. In the vicinity of the Dead Sea, even at the present time, deposits of sulphur are being formed. Blanckenhorn (ZDPV, 1896) believes that this formation is due to the action of bituminous matter upon gypsum, as these two substances are found associated with each other in this district. Travelers going from Jericho to the Dead Sea may pick up lumps of sulphur, which are usually encrusted with crystals of gypsum. De 29:23 well describes the present aspect of this region. That the…
Brimstone
An inflammable mineral substance found in quantities on the shores of the Dead Sea. The cities of the plain were destroyed by a rain of fire and brimstone (Gen. 19:24, 25). In Isa. 34:9 allusion is made to the destruction of these cities. This word figuratively denotes destruction or punishment (Job 18:15; Isa. 30:33; 34:9; Ps. 11:6; Ezek. 38:22). It is used to express the idea of excruciating torment in Rev. 14:10; 19:20; 20:10.
Brimstone, or sulphur, is found in considerable quantities on the shores of the Dead Sea. (Genesis 19:24) It is a well-known simple mineral substance, crystalline, easily melted, very inflammable, and when burning emits a peculiar suffocating odor. It is found in great abundance near volcanoes. The soil around Sodom and Gomorrah abounded in sulphur and bitumen.
A mineral substance, highly inflammable, and burning with a suffocating smell. Sodom and the other cities of the plain were destroyed "by brimstone and fire," Ge 19:24; and this awful catastrophe is often used in Scripture, as an emblem of temporal and eternal judgments of God upon the wicked, Job 18:15; Ps 11:6; Isa 30:33; 34:9; Re 21:8.
7 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 7 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
καθάπερ οὖν ἡ ἐν τῷ ἀρχιτεκτονικῷ προδιατυπωθεῖσα πόλις χώραν ἐκτὸς οὐκ εἶχεν, ἀλλ’ ἐνεσφράγιστο τῇ τοῦ τεχνίτου ψυχῇ, τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον οὐδ’ ὁ ἐκ τῶν ἰδεῶν κόσμος ἄλλον ἂν ἔχοι τόπον ἢ τὸν θεῖον λόγον τὸν ταῦτα διακοσμήσαντα·
οἰόμενος δὲ συμφορᾷ περιπεσεῖσθαι παρακούσαντας ἀναπείθει κακοήθως τὴν γυναῖκα γεύσασθαι τοῦ φυτοῦ τῆς φρονήσεως ἐν αὐτῷ λέγων εἶναι τήν τε τἀγαθοῦ καὶ τοῦ κακοῦ διάγνωσιν, ἧς γενομένης αὐτοῖς μακάριον καὶ μηδὲν ἀπολείποντα τοῦ θείου διάξειν βίον.
Διὰ φιλοξενίαν καὶ εὐσέβειαν Λὼτ ἐσώθη ἐκ Σοδόμων, τῆς περιχώρου πάσης κριθείσης διὰ πυρὸς καὶ θείου, πρόδηλον ποιήσας ὁ δεσπότης, ὅτι τοὺς ἐλπίζοντας ἐπ’ αὐτὸν οὐκ ἐγκαταλείπει, τοὺς δὲ ἑτεροκλινεῖς ὑπάρχοντας εἰς κόλασιν καὶ αἰκισμὸν τίθησιν.
βίαν παθὼν οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν, ἡγεμὼν κύριε, κα … … … ως θείου κατὰ πατρὸς … … … επ
Κοπρῆ Αὐρηλίαις Ταησίῳ καὶ Κυριλλοῦτι ἐκ μητρὸς Σαραπιάδος ἀφήλιξιν διὰ φροντιστοῦ τοῦ πρὸς μητρὸς θείου Αὐρηλίου Ἀμμωνίου Ἰσιδώρου ἀπὸ τῆς αὐτῆς κώμης χαίρειν. ἐπειδὴ κατέσχον καὶ ἐγεώργησα τρεισκαιδεκαέτει χρόνῳ
ἀμφοτέρων Κοπρῆ μητρὸς Σαραπιάδος ἀπὸ κώμης Καρανίδος διʼ ἐκδίκου καὶ κηδεστοῦ τοῦ κατὰ μητέρα θείου Αὐρηλίου Ἀμμωνίου Ἰσιδώρου ἀπὸ τῆς αὐτῆς κώμης Καρανίδος. πολύτροποι τυγχάνουσι αἱ τῶν ἀνδρῶν πλεονεξίαι,
The Greek word ἐνώπιον (i.e., *enopion*) means 'before' or 'in the presence of.' It is derived from a combination of prepositions and a term meaning 'face.' This word is often used in the New Testament, particularly in the writings of Luke and Revelation, to indicate being in the sight of someone, especially God, as seen in verses like Romans 14:22 and Revelation 1:4.
† ἐνώπιος, -ον
(< ὤψ),
[in LXX for פָּנִים, etc. ;]
face to face, in sight (Theocr.; ἄρτοι ἐ., Ex 25:29): neut., ἐνώπιον, in vernacular, with force of prep. c. gen. [in LXX for לְעֵינֵי, לִפְנֵי, etc., cf. Dalman, Words, 31 f., 209 f., and Deiss., BS., 213], in NT, most freq. in Lk, Ac, Re, never in Mt, Mk, before, in the presence of: Lk 1:19 4:7, Ac 4:10 6:5, Re 1:4 2:14, al.; esp. ἐ. Κυρίου (θεοῦ), in the sight of God, or with God as witness or as judge, Ro 14:22, I Co 1:29, I Ti 2:3, Ja 4:10, I Pe…
ἐνώπιον, neut. of the adj. ἐνώπιος, -ov, (i. 4. ὁ ἐν ὠπὶ ὦν, one who is in sight, Theocr. 22, 152; Sept. Ex. xxxiii. 11; ἄρτοι ἐνώπιοι, Ex. xxv. 29); used adverbially it gets the force of a preposition [W. § 54,6; B. 319 (274)], and is joined with the gen. (hardly to be found so in any prof. auth.), before, in sight of any one ; time and again in Sept. for .)}3 and +99, also for 33) and 33375 among N. T. writ. used most freq. by Luke and the auth. of the Rev., but never by Matthew and Mark. It is used 1. of occupied place: in that place which is before, or over against, opposite, any one and towards which another turns his eyes; @. prop.: εἶναι ἐνώπ. τινος, Rev. i. 4; vii. 15; [xiv. 5 Rec.]; so that εἶναι must be mentally supplied before ἐνώπιον, Rev. iv. 5 sq.; viii. 3; ix.13; after στῆναι, Acts x. 30; ἑστηκέναι, Rev. vil. 9; viii. 2; xi. 4; xii. 4; xx. 12; παρεστηκέναι, Lk. i. 19…
Read the full entry →ἐνώπιον. To Deissmann's proof (BS p. 213) that this word belongs to the vernacular, and is not to be treated as a new formation of ‘* biblical” Greek, much additional evidence can now be added from iii/B.c. onwards. The earliest ex. of the word known to us, P Hib J. 3055 (before B.c. 271), is unfortunately followed by a lacuna—y δίκη σου ἀναγραφήσετ[α]ι ἐν [τῶι ἐν Ἡρ]ακλέους πόλει δικαστηρίωι [ἐ]νῴπιον [. .. ., **the case will be drawn up against you in the court at Heracleopolis in the presence of . . .” (Edd.). Wilcken’s translation of BGU II. 5781 (a.p. 189) μετάδ(ος) ἐνώπι(ον), “deliver personally” (cited by Deissmann z¢ szfra) finds an exact parallel in P Tebt I. 141% (B.c. 114) παρηγγελκότες ἐνώπι[ον, “1 gave notice in person "᾿ (Edd,), P Flor I. 567° (A.D. 234) μετέδωκ(α) Avpnd((w) . . ἐνώπιον ὡς καθήκει. For the prepositional use with the gen. see P Lond 35° (B.c. 161) (=I. p.…
Read the full entry →ἐνώπιον (enōpion) — before.
ἐνώπ-ιος, ον,
(ὤψ) facing, to the front, πρό τ᾽ ἐνώπια [Refs 7th c.BC+]face to face, [LXX]; ἄρτοι ἐ. shewbread, [Refs]; διαστολῶν γεγονυιῶν ὑμῖν καὶ ἐνοπίοις (sic) καὶ διὰ γραμμάτων in person, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]
II. neuter ἐνώπιον as adverb, face to face, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; in person, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]: as preposition with genitive, [NT+4th c.BC+]. Regul. adverb -ίως[Refs]
ἐνώπιον
enopion
neuter of a compound of 1722 and a derivative of 3700; in the face of
(literally or figuratively):--before, in the presence (sight) of, to.
see GREEK for 1722
see GREEK for 3700
ἐνώπιον
Adv
before the face of, in the presence of
ἐνώπιον enōpion 94x
gen., before, in the presence of, Lk. 5:25; 8:47; in front of, Rev. 4:5, 6; immediately preceding as a forerunner, Lk. 1:17; Rev. 16:19; from the Hebrew, in the presence of, metaphysically, i.e. in the sphere of sensation or thought, Lk. 12:9; 15:10; Acts 10:31; in the eyes of, in the judgment of, Lk. 16:15; 24:11; Acts 4:19
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
be-for': The translation of a great variety of Hebrew and Greek words. "Haran died before (the English Revised Version "in the presence of," literally "before the face of") his father Terah" (Ge 11:28). To be "before" God is to enjoy His favor (Ps 31:22). "The Syrians before" (Isa 9:12 the Revised Version, margin "on the east," as "behind," owing to the position of Canaan, relative to Syria, implies the west).
95 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 94 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 148 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
οὐχ ὁρᾷς ὅτι ὁ Ἀβραὰμ „ἔτι ἦν ἑστηκὼς ἐνώπιον κυρίου καὶ ἐγγίσας εἶπε Μὴ συναπολέσῃς δίκαιον μετὰ ἀσεβοῦς“ (Gen.
καὶ ἴδωμεν, τί καλὸν καὶ τί τερπνὸν καὶ τί προσδεκτὸν ἐνώπιον τοῦ ποιήσαντος ἡμᾶς.
Καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι δὲ εὔσπλαγχνοι, εἰς πάντας ἐλεήμονες, ἐπιστρέφοντες τὰ ἀποπεπλανημένα, ἐπισκεπτόμενοι πάντας ἀσθενεῖς, μὴ ἀμελοῦντες χήρας ἢ ὀρφανοῦ ἢ πένητος ἀλλὰ προνοοῦντες ἀεὶ τοῦ καλοῦ ἐνώπιον θεοῦ καὶ ἀνθρώπων, ἀπεχόμενοι πάσης ὀργῆς,…
δημόσιον πυροῦ ἀρτάβαις ωκ ἐκωλύθην ὑπὸ Σαμβᾶτος τοῦ … … καὶ τῶν σὺν αὐτῷ ἐνώπιον συνόδου εἰς λόγον ἀνδρῶν ν, ἀναλαβόντος … στ … ἀνθρώπους … … τοδ
τῆς Ἡρακλείδου μερίδος τοῦ Ἀρσινοίτου στρατηγῷ χαίρειν. τοῦ δεδομένου ὑπομνήματος ἀντίγραφον μεταδοθήτω ὡς καθήκει ἐνώπιον. ἔτους ἐνάτου Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Τραϊανοῦ Ἁδριανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Τῦβι ιζ. Ἀνδρονίκῳ νεωκόρῳ τοῦ μεγάλου…
Ἡρακλείδης δοθεὶς εἰς κλῆρον ὑπηρετῶν μεταδέδωκα τὸ προγεγραμμένον ἐπιδικασθέντι μοι συνόντος Σαβείνου ἐν τῷ ἐνώπιον ὡς καθήκει. ἔτους ιθ Ἁδριανοῦ Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου Μεχὶρ γ.
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-GPM — Article · genitive · plural · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
T-GPM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
ov:
(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.
OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]
1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.
I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.
For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.
It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.
Lamentations 3:1.
The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.
Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.
That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.
Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word ἄγγελος (transliterated as aggelos) means 'messenger' and is often used to refer to a divine messenger or angel. It is derived from the verb ἀγγέλλω (to announce). In the New Testament, it encompasses both heavenly beings sent by God and human messengers, with interpretations varying regarding its use in specific contexts, such as in Revelation where it may refer to church leaders or guardian angels.
ἄγγελος, -ου, ὁ,
[in LXX chiefly for מַלְאָךְ;]
a messenger, one sent: Mt 11:10, Ja 22:25.
As in LXX, in the special sense of angel, a spiritual, heavenly being, attendant upon God and employed as his messenger to men, to make known his purposes, as Lk 1:11, or to execute them, as Mt 4:6. The ἄ. in Re 1:20 2:1, al., is variously understood as
a messenger or delegate,
a bishop or ruler,
a guardian angel,
the prevailing spirit of each church, i.e. the Church itself. (Cf. Swete, Ap)., in l.; DB, iv, 991; Thayer, s.v.; Cremer, 18; MM, VGT, s.v.)
ἄγγελος, -ου, ὁ, 1. a messenger, envoy, one who is sent: Mt. xi. 10; Lk. vil. 24, 27; ix. 52; Mk. i. 2; Jas. li. 25. [Fr. Hom. down. ] 2. In the Scriptures, both of the Old Test. and of the New, one of that host of heavenly spirits that, according alike to Jewish and Christian opinion, wait upon the monarch of the universe, and are sent by him to earth, now to execute his purposes (Mt. iv. 6, 11; xxviii. 2; Mk.i. 13; Lk. xvi. 22; xxii. 43 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; Acts vii. 35; xii. 23; Gal. iii. 19, ef. Heb. i. 14), now to make them known to men (LK. i. 11, 26, ii. 9 sqq.; Acts x. 3; xxvii. 23; Mt. i. 20; ii. 13; xxviii. 5; Jn. xx. 12 sq.); hence the frequent expressions ἄγγελος (angel, messenger of God, 3x90) and ἄγγελοι κυρίου or ayy. τοῦ θεοῦ. They are subject not only to God but also to Christ (Heb. i. 4 sqq.; 1 Pet. iii. 22, ef. Eph. i. 21; Gal. iv. 14), who is described as…
Read the full entry →ἄγγελος. In Sy// 51271, a dialect inscr. of ii/B.c. from Calymna, ἄγγελοι are envoys whose names are given. The word is used in the sense of ‘‘intermediary” (cf. Gal 319) in Sy// 122” (iv/B.C.) ὀμόσαι δ] ἀγγέλλων. For the presumably Christian ‘‘angel” inscriptions from Thera see Deissmann LAE, Ῥ. 279 with accompanying facsimile, and the paper “It is his Angel” (J. H. M.) in 71.5 1902, p. 519 f. Add (from Cronert) 7G XII. iii. 933. In Archzv iii. p. 445, No. 67, is published a Greek inscription from Assouan of the time of M. Aurelius, which begins—MeyaAy τύχῃ τοῦ [θε]ο[ῦ. . . τ]ῶν ἀνγέλων τῆς [ἱ]ερεί[ας] : cf. alsop. 451 No. 94 (time of Diocletian), Ὑπὲρ εὐχῆς τῶν ἀνγέλων ’Epeonvol ἀνέθηκαν | κτὰ. Οἱ ἄγγελοι θεοῦ, as in 1 Tim 54, occurs in the extremely interesting Jewish inscription Sy// 816'° κύριε Oo | πάντα ἐ[φ)ορῶν kal οἱ ἄνγελοι θεοῦ. Dittenberger assigns it to i/A.D. and yet…
Read the full entry →ἄγγελος (angelos) — angel.
ἄγγελος, ὁ, ἡ,
messenger, envoy, [Refs 8th c.BC+] — proverbial, Ἀράβιος ἄ., of a loquacious person, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
2. generally, one that announces or tells, e.g. of birds of augury, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Μουσῶν ἄγγελος, of a poet, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἄ. ἄφθογγος, of a beacon, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; of the nightingale, ὄρνις.. Διὸς ἄ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]
3. angel, [LXX+NT+1st c.AD+]
4. in later philosophical, semi-divine being, ἡλιακοὶ ἄ.[Refs 4th c.AD+] in R.2.243 K.; ἄ. καὶ ἀρχάγγελοι[Refs 5th c.AD+]: also in mystical and magical writings, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
II. title of Artemis at Syracuse, [Refs 5th c.AD+]
ἄγγελος (angelos) — angel: messenger.
ἄγγελος, ὁ, ἡ,
ἄγγελος
aggelos
from aggello (probably derived from 71; compare 34) (to bring
tidings); a messenger; especially an "angel"; by implication, a
pastor:--angel, messenger.
see GREEK for 71
see GREEK for 34
ἄγγελος, ου, ὁ
n.m.
an angel, messenger
ἀγγέλλω angellō 1x
to tell, to announce, Jn. 20:18*
ἄγγελος a messenger, envoy, Hom., Hdt., attic
generally, one that announces, of birds of augury, Il.; Μουσῶν ἄγγελος, of a poet, Theogn.; Διὸς ἄγγ., of the nightingale, Soph.; c. gen. rei, ἄγγ. κακῶν ἐμῶν id. Soph.
a divine messenger, an angel, NTest.
Noun-GPM — Noun · genitive · plural · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
N-GPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
By the word "angels" (i.e. "messengers" of God) we ordinarily understand a race of spiritual beings of a nature exalted far above that of man, although infinitely removed from that of God--whose office is "to do him service in heaven, and by his appointment to succor and defend men on earth. I. Scriptural use of the word . --There are many passages in which the expression "angel of God" is certainly used for a manifestation of God himself (Genesis 22:11) with Genesis 22:12 and Exod 3:2 with Exod 3:6 and Exod 3:14 It is to be observed, also, that side by side with these expressions we read of God’s being manifested in the…
- Created by God and Christ
- Worship God and Christ
- Are ministering Spirits
1Ki 19:5; Ps 68:17; 104:4; Lu 16:22; Ac 12:7-11; 27:23; Heb 1:7,14
- Communicate the will of God and Christ
184 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 176 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 119 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„ὁ θεός, ᾧ εὐηρέστησαν οἱ πατέρες μου Ἀβραὰμ καὶ Ἰσαάκ, ὁ θεὸς ὁ τρέφων με ἐκ νεότητος ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης, ὁ ἄγγελος ὁ ῥυόμενός με ἐκ πάντων τῶν κακῶν, εὐλογήσαι τὰ παιδία ταῦτα“ (Gen.
πολλοὶ γὰρ ἄγγελοι θεοῦ γυναιξὶ συνιόντες ὑβριστὰς ἐγέννησαν παῖδας καὶ παντὸς ὑπερόπτας καλοῦ διὰ τὴν ἐπὶ τῇ δυνάμει πεποίθησιν·
ἀλλὰ καὶ ἡ περιτομή, ἐφ̓ ᾗ πεποίθασιν, κατήργηται, περιτομὴν γὰρ εἴρηκεν οὐ σαρκὸς γενηθῆναι: ἀλλὰ παρέβησαν, ὅτι ἄγγελος πονηρὸς ἐσόφιζεν αὐτούς.
τὸ ἐφόδιον, ὅπως ἂν ἀνακομισθῶ πρὸς αὐτὸν καὶ μὴ δοκῆι με αὐτοῦ καταρρᾳθυμεῖν. καὶ ἄγγελόν μοι ἀπέστειλε καλῶν με. σὺ οὖν μοι τί συντάσσεις; εὐτύχει.
τὸν σταχθέντα ἐνιαύσιον χρόνον· καὶ ἐμοῦ ται τε Κορνηλίου ἀποπληρώσαντος καθʼ ὁμοιότητα καὶ ἐγὼ ἀγγελῶ τὸν ὁμογνήσιον σοῦ ἀδελφὸν Διόσκορον τῷ ἑξῆς ἔτει ἐκτελοῦντα καὶ αὐτὸν τὸν αὐτὸν ἐνιαύσιον
α … ατερα … α … ω … ταύταις ταῖς φωναῖς ἐχρήσατο ὁ ἄγγελος τοῦ θεοῦ μου ὁ ῥυσάμενός με ἐκ πάντων τῶν κακῶν μου. διό, γνήσιε τέκνον
The Greek word ἅγιος (i.e., *hagios*) means holy or sacred, derived from a root indicating reverence. It refers to things and places dedicated to God, such as temples, and to persons, including angels and saints. In the New Testament, it is often applied to God, Christ, and believers, emphasizing moral purity and separation for divine service. Notably, it can also imply a sense of veneration.
‘Iepos, probably the same word as the German ‘hehr’ (see Curtius, Grundziige, vol. v. p. 369), never in the N. T., and very seldom elsewhere, implies any moral excellence. It is singular how seldom the word is found there, indeed only twice (1 Cor. ix. 13; 2 Tim. iii. 15) ; and only once in the Septuagint (Josh. vi. 8: ἱεραὶ cadrvyyes); four times in 2 Maccabees, but not else in the Apocrypha; being in none of these instances employed of persons, who only are moral agents, but always of things. To persons the word elsewhere also is of rarest application, though examples are not wanting. Thus ἱερὸς ἄνθρωπος is in Aristophanes (Rane, 652) a man initiated in the mysteries ; kings for 328 SYNONYMS OF THE NEW TESTAMENT. § uxxxvut. Pindar (Pyth. v. 97 [Diss., 131 Heyn.]) are ἱεροί, as having their dignity from the gods; for Plutarch the Indian gymnosophists are ἄνδρες ἱεροὶ καὶ αὐτόνομοι (De…
Read the full entry →ἅγιος, -α, ον
(< τό ἅγός, religious awe; ἅζω, to venerate),
[in LXX chiefly for קֹ֫דֶשׁ;]
primarily, dedicated to the gods, sacred (Hdt.; rare in Att., never in Hom., Hes. and Trag., who use ἁγνός), hence, holy, characteristic of God, separated to God, worthy of veneration. Its highest application is to God himself, in his purity, majesty, and glory: Lk 1:49, Jo 17:11, Re 4:8. Hence
ἅγιος, -a, -ov, (fr. τὸ dyos religious awe, reverence ; dl, ἅζομαι, to venerate, revere, esp. the gods, parents, [Curtius § 1187), rare in prof. auth.; very frequent in the sacred writ.; in the Sept. for wap; 1. properly reverend, worthy of veneration: τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ θεοῦ, Lk. i. 49; God, on account of his incomparable majesty, Rev. iv. 8 (Is. vi. 3, ete.), i. q. ἔνδοξος. Hence used a. of things which on account of some connection with God possess a certain distinction and claim to reverence, as places sacred to God which are not to be profaned, Acts vii. 83; τόπος ἅγιος the temple, Mt. xxiv. 15 (on which pass. see βδέλυγμα, ¢.); Acts vi. 13; xxi. 28; the holy land or Palestine, 2 Mace. i. 29; ii. 18; τὸ ἅγιον and τὰ ἅγια [W. 177 (167)] the temple, Heb. ix. 1, 24 (cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 2, p. 477 sq.) ; spec. that part of the temple or tabernacle which is called ‘the holy place’…
Read the full entry →ἅγιος. The adjective is common as a title of the gods in the inscriptions, e. σ. OGZS 3781 (A.D. 18-9) θεῷ ἁγίῳ ὑψίστῳ : cf. 26, 721' ὃ δαδοῦχος τῶν ἁγιωτάτων ᾿Εἰλευσῖνι μυστηρίων. The superlative may be further illustrated (cf. Jude?) from the oldest recovered Christian letter P Amh I. 3(a)iii 22f. (between A.D. 264 (265) and 282 (281)) τοῖς κατ᾽ αἰὐτὸν ἁγιωτάτοις προ[εστῶσι]: cf. Deissmann Z4Z, p. 192 ff. For τὸ ἅγιον as “temple” cf. OGZS 56° (the Canopus inscr. of Ptolemy III, B.c. 239) καθιδρῦσαι [sc. ἄγαλμα Χρυσοῦν διάλιθον] ἐν τῶι ἁγίωι. : ἁγιότης, ἁγιωσύνη. ᾿Αγιότης, as a title, is found in the late P Giss I. 55° (vi/A.D.) addressed by one “‘ papa” or ‘‘ bishop ” to another --ἠξιώθην. . . γράψαι πρ[ὸ]ς τὴν σὴν ἁγιότητα]. Fora similar use of ἡ ἁγιωσύνη with reference to an ἐπίσκοπος, see the Pe/agfa-Legenden (ed. Usener) p. 107, cf. p. 84, On the “‘profane” warrant for ἁγιωσύνη…
Read the full entry →ἅγιος (hagios) — holy.
ἅγιος [ᾰ], α, ον,
devoted to the gods:
I. in good sense, sacred, holy:
I.1. of things, especially temples, ἈΦροδίτης ἱρὸν ἅ.[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἱρο᾽ν Ἡρακλέος ἅ.[Refs 5th c.BC+]; μητρός.. ἐστι πατρὶς ἁγιώτερον[Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἅ., τό, temple, [LXX+NT]Holy of Holies, [NT]
I.2. of persons, holy, pure, [LXX+5th c.BC+] οἱ ἅ. the Saints, [NT] πνεῦμα ἅ. the Holy Spirit, [NT] adverb ἁγίως καὶ σεμνῶς ἔχειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]
II. in bad sense, accursed, execrable, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; rare in Attic dialect (see. above). (Possibly cognate with Sanskrit yajati 'sacrifice'.)
ἅγιος (hagios) — holy: saint.
ἅγιος [ᾰ], α, ον,
devoted to the gods:
I. in good sense, sacred, holy:
ἅγιος
hagios
from hagos (an awful thing) (compare 53, 2282); sacred (physically,
pure, morally blameless or religious, ceremonially,
consecrated):--(most) holy (one, thing), saint.
see GREEK for 53
see GREEK for 2282
ἅγιος, ία, ον
Adj
set apart, holy, sacred
ἅγιος hagios 233x
separate from common condition and use; dedicated. Lk. 2:23; hallowed; used of things, τὰ ἅγια, the sanctuary; and of persons, saints, e.g., members of the first Christian communities; pure, righteous, ceremonially or morally; holy
ἅγιος ἄγος devoted to the gods, sacred, holy, Lat. sacer:
of things, esp. temples, Hdt., Xen., etc.: τὸ ἅγιον the Temple, τὰ ἅγια τῶν ἁγίων theHoly of Holies, NTest.
of persons, holy, pure, Ar.; adv. ἁγίως, Isocr., NTest.—The word never occurs in Hom. or Trag., ἁγνός being used instead.
228 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 234 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 438 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
Ἐπεὶ δ’ ὁ σύμπας κόσμος ἐτελειώθη κατὰ τὴν ἑξάδος ἀριθμοῦ τελείου φύσιν, τὴν ἐπιοῦσαν ἡμέραν ἑβδόμην ἐσέμνυνεν ὁ πατὴρ ἐπαινέσας καὶ ἁγίαν προσειπών·
καὶ ὁ μὲν πᾶς ναὸς ἅγιον ἐκαλεῖτο, τὸ δʼ ἄβατον τὸ ἐντὸς τῶν τεσσάρων κιόνων τοῦ ἁγίου τὸ ἅγιον.
ναὸς γὰρ ἅγιος, ἀδελφοί μου, τῷ κυρίῳ τὸ κατοικητήριον ἡμῶν τῆς καρδίας.
περὶ τοῦ ὀρόβου Τηλέμαχον ἰδεῖν ἢ Ἀρτέμωνα. Μητροδώρωι τὴν παρὰ Νέστου ἐντολὴν ἀποδοῦναι. Ἀγίαν τὸν παρὰ Μακίνου ὑπηρέτην ἰδεῖν. ἐκ τῆς ὑπερορίας τῶν ὑποδιφθέρων τί τέλος ἐστίν. Φοίνικα
τὸ προσκύνημα τοῦ ἁγίου τόπου καὶ τοῦ γράψαντος παρὰ πᾶσι τοῖς θεοῖς Φιλόσοφος
⳨ τῷ ἁγίῳ μοναστηρίῳ ἄπα Δωροθέου … … … … η … ω ἀπὸ ἐποικίου Νειλάμμωνος παρὰ
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
The Greek word ἐνώπιον (i.e., *enopion*) means 'before' or 'in the presence of.' It is derived from a combination of prepositions and a term meaning 'face.' This word is often used in the New Testament, particularly in the writings of Luke and Revelation, to indicate being in the sight of someone, especially God, as seen in verses like Romans 14:22 and Revelation 1:4.
† ἐνώπιος, -ον
(< ὤψ),
[in LXX for פָּנִים, etc. ;]
face to face, in sight (Theocr.; ἄρτοι ἐ., Ex 25:29): neut., ἐνώπιον, in vernacular, with force of prep. c. gen. [in LXX for לְעֵינֵי, לִפְנֵי, etc., cf. Dalman, Words, 31 f., 209 f., and Deiss., BS., 213], in NT, most freq. in Lk, Ac, Re, never in Mt, Mk, before, in the presence of: Lk 1:19 4:7, Ac 4:10 6:5, Re 1:4 2:14, al.; esp. ἐ. Κυρίου (θεοῦ), in the sight of God, or with God as witness or as judge, Ro 14:22, I Co 1:29, I Ti 2:3, Ja 4:10, I Pe…
ἐνώπιον, neut. of the adj. ἐνώπιος, -ov, (i. 4. ὁ ἐν ὠπὶ ὦν, one who is in sight, Theocr. 22, 152; Sept. Ex. xxxiii. 11; ἄρτοι ἐνώπιοι, Ex. xxv. 29); used adverbially it gets the force of a preposition [W. § 54,6; B. 319 (274)], and is joined with the gen. (hardly to be found so in any prof. auth.), before, in sight of any one ; time and again in Sept. for .)}3 and +99, also for 33) and 33375 among N. T. writ. used most freq. by Luke and the auth. of the Rev., but never by Matthew and Mark. It is used 1. of occupied place: in that place which is before, or over against, opposite, any one and towards which another turns his eyes; @. prop.: εἶναι ἐνώπ. τινος, Rev. i. 4; vii. 15; [xiv. 5 Rec.]; so that εἶναι must be mentally supplied before ἐνώπιον, Rev. iv. 5 sq.; viii. 3; ix.13; after στῆναι, Acts x. 30; ἑστηκέναι, Rev. vil. 9; viii. 2; xi. 4; xii. 4; xx. 12; παρεστηκέναι, Lk. i. 19…
Read the full entry →ἐνώπιον. To Deissmann's proof (BS p. 213) that this word belongs to the vernacular, and is not to be treated as a new formation of ‘* biblical” Greek, much additional evidence can now be added from iii/B.c. onwards. The earliest ex. of the word known to us, P Hib J. 3055 (before B.c. 271), is unfortunately followed by a lacuna—y δίκη σου ἀναγραφήσετ[α]ι ἐν [τῶι ἐν Ἡρ]ακλέους πόλει δικαστηρίωι [ἐ]νῴπιον [. .. ., **the case will be drawn up against you in the court at Heracleopolis in the presence of . . .” (Edd.). Wilcken’s translation of BGU II. 5781 (a.p. 189) μετάδ(ος) ἐνώπι(ον), “deliver personally” (cited by Deissmann z¢ szfra) finds an exact parallel in P Tebt I. 141% (B.c. 114) παρηγγελκότες ἐνώπι[ον, “1 gave notice in person "᾿ (Edd,), P Flor I. 567° (A.D. 234) μετέδωκ(α) Avpnd((w) . . ἐνώπιον ὡς καθήκει. For the prepositional use with the gen. see P Lond 35° (B.c. 161) (=I. p.…
Read the full entry →ἐνώπιον (enōpion) — before.
ἐνώπ-ιος, ον,
(ὤψ) facing, to the front, πρό τ᾽ ἐνώπια [Refs 7th c.BC+]face to face, [LXX]; ἄρτοι ἐ. shewbread, [Refs]; διαστολῶν γεγονυιῶν ὑμῖν καὶ ἐνοπίοις (sic) καὶ διὰ γραμμάτων in person, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]
II. neuter ἐνώπιον as adverb, face to face, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; in person, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]: as preposition with genitive, [NT+4th c.BC+]. Regul. adverb -ίως[Refs]
ἐνώπιον
enopion
neuter of a compound of 1722 and a derivative of 3700; in the face of
(literally or figuratively):--before, in the presence (sight) of, to.
see GREEK for 1722
see GREEK for 3700
ἐνώπιον
Adv
before the face of, in the presence of
ἐνώπιον enōpion 94x
gen., before, in the presence of, Lk. 5:25; 8:47; in front of, Rev. 4:5, 6; immediately preceding as a forerunner, Lk. 1:17; Rev. 16:19; from the Hebrew, in the presence of, metaphysically, i.e. in the sphere of sensation or thought, Lk. 12:9; 15:10; Acts 10:31; in the eyes of, in the judgment of, Lk. 16:15; 24:11; Acts 4:19
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
be-for': The translation of a great variety of Hebrew and Greek words. "Haran died before (the English Revised Version "in the presence of," literally "before the face of") his father Terah" (Ge 11:28). To be "before" God is to enjoy His favor (Ps 31:22). "The Syrians before" (Isa 9:12 the Revised Version, margin "on the east," as "behind," owing to the position of Canaan, relative to Syria, implies the west).
95 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 94 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 148 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
οὐχ ὁρᾷς ὅτι ὁ Ἀβραὰμ „ἔτι ἦν ἑστηκὼς ἐνώπιον κυρίου καὶ ἐγγίσας εἶπε Μὴ συναπολέσῃς δίκαιον μετὰ ἀσεβοῦς“ (Gen.
καὶ ἴδωμεν, τί καλὸν καὶ τί τερπνὸν καὶ τί προσδεκτὸν ἐνώπιον τοῦ ποιήσαντος ἡμᾶς.
Καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι δὲ εὔσπλαγχνοι, εἰς πάντας ἐλεήμονες, ἐπιστρέφοντες τὰ ἀποπεπλανημένα, ἐπισκεπτόμενοι πάντας ἀσθενεῖς, μὴ ἀμελοῦντες χήρας ἢ ὀρφανοῦ ἢ πένητος ἀλλὰ προνοοῦντες ἀεὶ τοῦ καλοῦ ἐνώπιον θεοῦ καὶ ἀνθρώπων, ἀπεχόμενοι πάσης ὀργῆς,…
δημόσιον πυροῦ ἀρτάβαις ωκ ἐκωλύθην ὑπὸ Σαμβᾶτος τοῦ … … καὶ τῶν σὺν αὐτῷ ἐνώπιον συνόδου εἰς λόγον ἀνδρῶν ν, ἀναλαβόντος … στ … ἀνθρώπους … … τοδ
τῆς Ἡρακλείδου μερίδος τοῦ Ἀρσινοίτου στρατηγῷ χαίρειν. τοῦ δεδομένου ὑπομνήματος ἀντίγραφον μεταδοθήτω ὡς καθήκει ἐνώπιον. ἔτους ἐνάτου Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Τραϊανοῦ Ἁδριανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Τῦβι ιζ. Ἀνδρονίκῳ νεωκόρῳ τοῦ μεγάλου…
Ἡρακλείδης δοθεὶς εἰς κλῆρον ὑπηρετῶν μεταδέδωκα τὸ προγεγραμμένον ἐπιδικασθέντι μοι συνόντος Σαβείνου ἐν τῷ ἐνώπιον ὡς καθήκει. ἔτους ιθ Ἁδριανοῦ Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου Μεχὶρ γ.
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-GSN — Article · genitive · singular · neutergenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
T-GSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word ἀρνίον (lemma: arnion) means 'a little lamb' or simply 'lamb.' It is a diminutive form derived from ἀρήν and is used in various contexts, including the New Testament, where it often refers to Christ as the sacrificial lamb. The term appears frequently in Revelation, highlighting its significance in early Christian texts.
ἀρνίον, -ου, τό
(dimin. of ἀρήν; v. MM, s.v.),
[in LXX: Ps 113 (114):4, 6 (pl., עאֹן בְּנֵן), Je 11:19 (כֶּבֶשׁ), 27 (50):45 (צָעִיר)*;]
a little lamb, a lamb: Jo 21:15, Re27.†
ἀρνίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. fr. ἀρήν, 4. v.), [fr. Lys. down], a little lamb, a lamb: Rev. xiii. 11; Jesus calls his followers τὰ ἀρνία pov in Jn. xxi. 15; τὸ ἀρνίον is used of Christ, innocently suffering and dying to expiate the sins of men, very often in Rey., as v. 6, 8,12, etc. (Jer. xi. 19; xxvii. (1.) 45 ; Ps. exiii. (exiv.) 4, 6; Joseph. antt. 3, 8, 10.)
ἀρνίον. P Theéad 814 (A.D. 306) ἀρνία ἐνιαύσια,15 ἀρνία καὶ ἐρύφια. BGU II. 3775 7 (early vii)A.p.), with other animal names, many in the -tov form—kKapyAt(a), ὀρνίθ(ια), perh. χοίρ(ια), ete. P Strass I. 247% (A.p, 118) ἀρνίων ἐπιγονῆ(ς) . - ἀριθμῶι ἀρνίω(ν). P Gen I. 687 (Α.Ὁ. 382) ἀρνία ἕνδεκα. Its choice by the author of the Apocalypse as an exclusive term, for very frequent use, is part of a general tendency of the vernacular, in which nouns in -ίον multiplied fast: it is interesting to note that he has followed that tendency much earlier than our papyrus writers did in the case of this word. The complete absence of diminutive force in ἀρνίον as against ἀρήν may be noted. (MGr ἀρνί.)
ἀρνίον (arnion) — lamb.
ἀρνίον, τό,
diminutive of ἀρήν, a little lamb, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II. sheepskin, fleece, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
ἀρνίον
arnion
diminutive from 704; a lambkin:--lamb.
see GREEK for 704
ἀρνίον, ου, τό
n.n.
a lamb
ἀρνίον ἀρνός a sheep-skin, Luc.
Noun-GSN — Noun · genitive · singular · neutergenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
N-GSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter
Lamb
(1.) Heb. kebes, a male lamb from the first to the third year. Offered daily at the morning and the evening sacrifice (Ex. 29:38-42), on the Sabbath day (Num. 28:9), at the feast of the New Moon (28:11), of Trumpets (29:2), of Tabernacles (13-40), of Pentecost (Lev. 23:18-20), and of the Passover (Ex. 12:5), and on many other occasions (1 Chr. 29:21; 2 Chr. 29:21; Lev. 9:3; 14:10-25).
The young of the sheep, and also the kid of the goat, Ex 12:5, Christ is the Lamb of God, Joh 1:29, as being the accepted sacrifice for human sin. The sacrifices of the Old Testament were an ordained and perpetual foreshadowing not only of his spotless holiness and his unresisting meekness, Isa 53:4-9. He is described in Re 5:6 12:11, as wearing the form of a sacrificial lamb in heaven itself. See PASSOVER and SACRIFICES.
→ Offering of Ex 29:38-41; Le 3:7; 4:32; 5:6; 22:23; 23:12; Nu 6:12; 7:15,21; 28:3-8
→ Not to be seethed (boiled) in its own mother's milk Ex 23:19
31 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 30 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
ἀποκριναμένων δὲ ἡμῶν, ὅτι „νόμιμα παρ’ ἑτέροις ἕτερα καὶ χρῆσις ἐνίων ὡς ἡμῖν καὶ τοῖς ἀντιδίκοις ἀπείρηται“, καὶ φαμένου τινὸς „ὡς πολλοί γε καὶ τὰ προχειρότατα ἀρνία οὐ προσφέρονται“, γελάσας „εὖ γε“ εἶπεν, „ἔστι γὰρ οὐχ ἡδέα.“
μόσχον τε καὶ κριὸν σὺν ἀρνίῳ ἐτείῳ ὁλομελῆ καυθησόμενα καὶ σὺν αὐτοῖς χίμαρον ἐπὶ παραιτήσει ἁμαρτημάτων.
λέγει γὰρ ὁ κύριος Ἔσεσθε ὡς ἀρνία ἐν μέσῳ λύκων.
εἰς τὸ ἐνεστὸς ιδ ἔτος Ἀντωνίνου Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου καὶ τοὺς ἐπακολουθοῦντας ἀπὸ γονῆς ἀρνίον α, ὃ νεμήσεται περὶ τὴν αὐτὴν κώμην καὶ διὰ ὅλου τοῦ νομοῦ διὰ νομέως
Στατιανοῦ τοῦ λαμπροτάτου ἡγεμόνος τὰ νῦν κτηθέντα μοι εἰς τὴν ἐνεστῶσαν ἡμέραν πρόβατα λη ἀρνία ιβ αἶγας β, ἃ καὶ νεμήσεται περὶ κώμην Παλῶσιν καὶ διʼ ὅλου τοῦ νομοῦ
μέρει τῶν κατʼ ἔτος ἐκβησομένων ἐξ αὐτῶν λημμάτων, διδόντος ἐμοῦ ὑπὲρ ἐπιγονῆς κατʼ ἔτος ἀρνία ἐνιαύσια εὐάρεστα θηλυκά τε καὶ ἀρρενικὰ εἴκοσι ἓξ ἔμποκα ἐπὶ λήμμασιν τοῖς προκειμένοις· δώσω